Front cover

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm SG24-5250-10

IBM System Storage

Solutions Handbook
Learn about IBM storage products and
solutions

Get flexible, scalable storage

solutions for the on demand world

Find the products that

answer your business needs

Ezgi Coskun
Pauli Rämö
Renato Santos
Rucel F. Javier
Megan Gilge

ibm.com/redbooks
Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250edno.fm

International Technical Support Organization

IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

May 2015

SG24-5250-10
5250edno.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in “Notices” on
page xv.

Eleventh Edition (May 2015)

This edition applies to IBM storage products portfolio as of March 2015.

This document created or updated on May 11, 2015.

© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1999, 2015. All rights reserved.
Note to U.S. Government Users Restricted Rights -- Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule
Contract with IBM Corp.
Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250TOC.fm

Contents

Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi

IBM Redbooks promotions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Now you can become a published author, too! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
Comments welcome. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
Stay connected to IBM Redbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv

Part 1. IBM storage solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Chapter 1. Introduction to IBM storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1.1 Why IBM Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2 Overview of the IBM storage solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3 IBM Spectrum Storage family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.3.1 IBM Spectrum Virtualize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.3.2 IBM Spectrum Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.3.3 IBM Spectrum Accelerate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.3.4 IBM Spectrum Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.3.5 IBM Spectrum Protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.3.6 IBM Spectrum Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.4 IBM Storage Cloud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.4.1 Support for the OpenStack platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.4.2 IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.5 IBM PureSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.6 IBM storage disk systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.6.1 Entry-level disk systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.6.2 Midrange disk systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.6.3 Enterprise disk systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.6.4 IBM FlashSystem storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.6.5 IBM SONAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.6.6 IBM N series expansion units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.7 IBM tape systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.7.1 IBM tape drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.7.2 Tape automation products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.7.3 Tape virtualization from IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.8 Storage area networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.8.1 Fibre Channel based networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.9 Software solutions for IBM storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.9.1 IBM storage virtualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.9.2 Products for storage virtualization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.10 High Performance Storage System (HPSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.11 Withdrawn products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Chapter 2. IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.1.1 What is new in VSC V5.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999, 2015. All rights reserved. iii

5250TOC.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

2.2 Storage hypervisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

2.3 IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.3.1 Storage management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.3.2 Storage virtualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.3.3 Application-aware data protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.4 IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.4.1 Efficient by design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.4.2 Self-optimizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.4.3 Cloud agile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.5 IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.5.1 OpenStack Cinder support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.5.2 IBM SmartCloud Storage Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.5.3 IBM Cloud Orchestrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.5.4 VMware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.6 IBM Virtual Storage Center offerings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.6.1 License model overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.6.2 VSC license: Enterprise deployment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.6.3 VSC Entry license . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.6.4 VSC for Storwize Family license . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.7 More information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Chapter 3. IBM storage cloud solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.1.1 Cloud computing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.2 Storage cloud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.2.1 Storage cloud benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.3 Storage cloud delivery models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.3.1 Public storage cloud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3.3.2 Private storage cloud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3.3.3 Hybrid storage cloud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3.3.4 Community storage cloud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.4 IBM storage hardware cloud offerings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3.5 IBM storage software cloud offerings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3.5.1 IBM SoftLayer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3.5.2 IBM Cloud Managed Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.6 IBM Cloud Orchestrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3.7 IBM cloud disaster recovery solutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
3.7.1 Cloud-managed backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3.7.2 Cloud Data Virtualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3.7.3 Cloud server recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3.7.4 Cloud email management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3.7.5 More information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Chapter 4. IBM PureSystems overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

4.1 IBM PureFlex System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.2 IBM PureApplication System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4.3 IBM PureData System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4.3.1 IBM PureData System for Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4.3.2 IBM PureData System for Analytics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
4.3.3 IBM PureData System for Operational Analytics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4.4 IBM Flex System: The building blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.4.1 Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.4.2 Compute nodes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

iv IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250TOC.fm

4.4.3 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.4.4 Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.4.5 Infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4.5 IBM Flex System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4.5.1 IBM Flex System Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4.5.2 IBM Flex System Enterprise Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4.5.3 Compute nodes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4.5.4 Expansion nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
4.5.5 I/O modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4.5.6 Storage (internal and external) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Chapter 5. IBM Spectrum Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

5.1 IBM Spectrum Storage family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
5.2 Overview of IBM Spectrum Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
5.2.1 IBM Spectrum Scale delivery models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.2.2 IBM Spectrum Scale cluster configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.2.3 Sharing data between IBM Spectrum Scale clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.2.4 Accessing data in IBM Spectrum Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.2.5 Advanced features of IBM Spectrum Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.3 Use cases for IBM Spectrum Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.4 IBM Elastic Storage Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
5.4.1 IBM Elastic Storage Server hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
5.4.2 IBM Elastic Storage Server software features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5.5 IBM Spectrum Scale for Linux on IBM z System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5.6 More information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Part 2. Disk systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Chapter 6. Entry-level disk storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

6.1 Overview of entry-level series models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.1.1 IBM Storwize V3700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.1.2 IBM System Storage EXP2500 Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.2 IBM Storwize V3700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
6.2.1 IBM Storwize V3700 components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
6.2.2 IBM Storwize V3700 software and configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6.3 IBM System Storage EXP2500 Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
6.4 More information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Chapter 7. Midrange disk systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

7.1 IBM Storwize V5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
7.1.1 IBM Storwize V5000 models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
7.1.2 Control enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
7.1.3 Expansion enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
7.1.4 Host connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
7.1.5 Disk drive types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
7.1.6 IBM Storwize V5000 features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
7.2 IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
7.2.1 IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
7.2.2 IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
7.2.3 IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
7.2.4 IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
7.2.5 IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
7.2.6 Supported disk drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
7.2.7 IBM Storwize V7000 expansion enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Contents v
5250TOC.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

7.2.8 SAS cabling requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

7.2.9 IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
7.2.10 Management and support tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
7.2.11 Additional references for Storwize V7000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
7.3 IBM Storwize V7000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
7.3.1 IBM Storwize V7000 components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
7.3.2 IBM Storwize V7000 features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
7.3.3 IBM Storwize V7000 management and support tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
7.3.4 IBM Storwize V7000 Version 7, Release 4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
7.3.5 IBM Storwize V7000 supported environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
7.3.6 More information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
7.3.7 IBM Storwize terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
7.4 IBM System Storage DCS3700. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
7.4.1 DCS3700 components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
7.4.2 Overview of IBM System Storage DCS3700. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
7.4.3 IBM System Storage DCS3700 Expansion Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Chapter 8. Enterprise disk systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

8.1 Enterprise disk family overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
8.1.1 DS8000 series overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
8.1.2 XIV series overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
8.1.3 Infrastructure simplification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
8.1.4 Business continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
8.2 DS8000 series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
8.2.1 The DS8870 with IBM POWER7 processor technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
8.2.2 DS8000 concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.2.3 The DS8000 series design keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
8.2.4 Overview of DS8000 recent features and technology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
8.3 IBM DS8870 architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
8.3.1 Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
8.3.2 DS8870 architecture overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
8.3.3 Disk Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
8.3.4 Power and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
8.3.5 Management console network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
8.3.6 DS8000 series products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
8.3.7 DS8800 management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
8.3.8 IBM Standby Capacity on Demand offering for the DS8870. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
8.3.9 DS8000 Copy Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
8.3.10 DS8000 licensing overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
8.3.11 DS8000 supported environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
8.3.12 DS8000 series: more information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
8.4 IBM XIV Storage System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
8.4.1 New features in XIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
8.4.2 Architecture overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
8.4.3 Key design features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
8.4.4 IBM XIV Storage System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
8.4.5 Parallelism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
8.4.6 Full storage virtualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
8.4.7 Reliability, availability, and serviceability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
8.4.8 More information about the IBM XIV Storage System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
8.5 Comparison of Enterprise products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 9. IBM FlashSystem storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

vi IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250TOC.fm

9.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

9.2 Why flash matters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
9.3 IBM FlashSystem 840 and V840 storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
9.4 IBM FlashSystem 900 storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
9.4.1 FlashCore technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
9.4.2 Highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
9.4.3 More information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
9.5 IBM FlashSystem V9000 storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
9.5.1 Highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
9.5.2 More information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Chapter 10. IBM Scale Out Network Attached Storage (SONAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
10.1 Software overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
10.2 Hardware overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
10.3 Additional information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Chapter 11. IBM System Storage N series expansion units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

11.1 Expansion units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
11.2 More information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Part 3. Tape systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Chapter 12. IBM tape drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

12.1 LTO technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
12.1.1 Interleaved recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
12.1.2 Servo tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
12.1.3 Track following . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
12.1.4 Longitudinal positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
12.1.5 Backwards compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
12.2 IBM Ultrium 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
12.2.1 Ultrium technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
12.2.2 WORM tape format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
12.2.3 IBM Linear Tape File System (LTFS) software application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
12.2.4 Reliability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
12.3 IBM LTO tape drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
12.3.1 IBM TS2240 Tape Drive Express Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
12.3.2 IBM TS2250 Tape Drive Express Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
12.3.3 IBM TS2260 Tape Drive Express Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
12.3.4 IBM TS2340 Tape Drive Express Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
12.3.5 IBM System Storage TS2350 Tape Drive Express Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
12.3.6 IBM System Storage TS2360 Tape Drive Express Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
12.4 IBM TS1100 tape drive family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
12.4.1 IBM TS1100 tape family generations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
12.4.2 IBM TS1120 tape drive overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
12.5 IBM TS1130 tape drive overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
12.6 IBM TS1140 tape drive overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
12.7 IBM TS1150 tape drive overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
12.8 IBM midrange and enterprise storage media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
12.8.1 LTO cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
12.8.2 More information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Chapter 13. IBM tape automation products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

13.1 Important IBM tape library features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
13.1.1 Advanced Library Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Contents vii
5250TOC.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

13.1.2 IBM High Density function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

13.1.3 Control Path Failover and Data Path Failover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
13.1.4 Tape System Reporter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
13.2 Overview of available tape libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
13.3 IBM TS2900 Tape Autoloader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
13.3.1 IBM TS2900 Tape Autoloader features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
13.3.2 IBM TS2900 Tape Autoloader specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
13.4 IBM TS3100 Tape Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
13.4.1 IBM TS3100 Tape Library features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
13.4.2 IBM TS3100 Tape Library specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
13.5 IBM TS3200 Tape Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
13.5.1 IBM TS3200 Tape Library features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
13.5.2 IBM TS3200 Tape Library specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
13.6 IBM TS3310 Tape Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
13.6.1 IBM TS3310 Tape Library features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
13.6.2 IBM TS3310 Tape Library specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
13.7 IBM TS3500 Tape Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
13.7.1 IBM High Density frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
13.7.2 Virtual I/O slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
13.7.3 IBM TS3000 System Console (TSSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
13.7.4 Tape System Library Manager (TSLM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
13.7.5 IBM TS3500 Tape Library specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
13.7.6 IBM TS3500 Tape Library Shuttle Complex (Model SC1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
13.8 IBM TS4500 Tape Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
13.9 IBM Linear Tape File System (LTFS) software application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
13.9.1 IBM LTFS Single Drive Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
13.9.2 IBM LTFS Storage Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
13.9.3 IBM LTFS Library Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
13.9.4 IBM LTFS Enterprise Edition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Chapter 14. IBM tape virtualization products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

14.1 Introduction to tape virtualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
14.2 Concept of data deduplication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
14.2.1 Types of data deduplication and HyperFactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
14.2.2 HyperFactor technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
14.2.3 Data deduplication processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
14.3 IBM System Storage TS7600 ProtecTIER Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
14.3.1 ProtecTIER models for open systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
14.3.2 ProtecTIER TS7600 system modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
14.4 TS7650G ProtecTIER Deduplication Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
14.4.1 TS7650G Gateway overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
14.4.2 TS7650G Gateway Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
14.4.3 TS7650G ProtecTIER Deduplication Gateway (3958 DD5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
14.4.4 Common Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
14.4.5 Disk array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
14.4.6 Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
14.5 TS7620 ProtecTIER Deduplication Appliance Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
14.5.1 Highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
14.5.2 Product features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
14.5.3 TS7620 Appliance hardware components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
14.5.4 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
14.5.5 TS3500 Tape Library emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
14.6 ProtecTIER Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

viii IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250TOC.fm

14.7 ProtecTIER Native Replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

14.7.1 Types of replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
14.7.2 Benefits of ProtecTIER Native Replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
14.8 IBM Virtualization Engine TS7700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
14.8.1 IBM Virtualization Engine TS7700 highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
14.8.2 Characteristics of the IBM Virtualization Engine TS7700 components . . . . . . . 380
14.9 IBM Data Facility Storage Management Subsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
14.9.1 IBM Data Facility Storage Management Subsystem Removable Media Manager for
z/OS environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
14.9.2 DFSMSrmm highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
14.10 More information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Chapter 15. Complementary products for tape storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

15.1 IBM Crossroads ReadVerify Appliance (RVA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
15.1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
15.1.2 Additional information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
15.2 IBM DDS Generation 5 USB Tape Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
15.2.1 IBM DDS Generation 5 USB Tape Drive highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
15.2.2 Additional information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
15.3 IBM DDS Generation 6 USB Tape Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
15.3.1 IBM DDS Generation 6 USB Tape Drive highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
15.3.2 Additional information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
15.4 IBM External Tape Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
15.4.1 IBM System Storage 7216 Multimedia Enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
15.4.2 IBM System Storage 7226 Multimedia Enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Part 4. Storage networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Chapter 16. Introduction to storage networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

16.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
16.2 Storage area network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
16.2.1 Fibre Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
16.2.2 Converged network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
16.3 IP storage networking technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
16.3.1 iSCSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
16.3.2 FCIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
16.3.3 iFCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
16.3.4 Comparison of iSCSI, FCIP, iFCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
16.3.5 FCoE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
16.3.6 More information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
16.4 SAN topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
16.4.1 Point-to-point topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
16.4.2 Loop (arbitrated) topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
16.4.3 Switched topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
16.4.4 Single switched fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
16.4.5 Switched fabric with redundancy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
16.5 Physical components of SAN infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
16.5.1 Cables and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
16.5.2 Transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
16.5.3 Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
16.5.4 iSCSI HBAs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
16.5.5 FCoE adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
16.5.6 SAN switches, routers, and directors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
16.5.7 Naming and addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Contents ix
5250TOC.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

16.5.8 Types of ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

16.5.9 FICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
16.6 Network Attached Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
16.6.1 NAS benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
16.6.2 NAS gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
16.7 Wavelength Division Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
16.8 Selecting the best alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
16.9 More information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

Chapter 17. Storage area network products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

17.1 SAN networking products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
17.1.1 Common characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
17.1.2 Features specific to the IBM b-type SAN switches and directors . . . . . . . . . . . 422
17.1.3 Features specific to the Cisco SAN switches and directors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
17.2 Entry SAN switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
17.2.1 IBM System Storage SAN24B-4 Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
17.2.2 IBM System Networking SAN24B-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
17.3 Midrange SAN switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
17.3.1 IBM System Storage SAN48B-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
17.3.2 IBM System Networking SAN96B-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
17.3.3 Cisco MDS 9148S 16G Multilayer Fabric Switch for IBM System Storage. . . . 430
17.3.4 Cisco MDS 9148 for IBM System Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
17.4 Enterprise SAN switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
17.4.1 IBM System Storage SAN384B-2 and SAN768B-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
17.4.2 Cisco MDS 9500 Series Multilayer Directors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
17.4.3 Cisco MDS 9710 Multilayer Director . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
17.5 SAN specialty switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
17.5.1 IBM System Storage SAN06B-R Extension Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
17.5.2 IBM System Storage SAN42B-R Extension Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
17.5.3 Cisco MDS 9222i for IBM System Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
17.5.4 Cisco MDS 9250i Multiservice Fabric Switch for IBM System Storage. . . . . . . 442
17.6 SAN solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
17.6.1 Infrastructure simplification solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
17.6.2 Business continuity solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
17.6.3 Multiprotocol routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
17.6.4 Data center bridging and consolidation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
17.7 More information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

Chapter 18. Converged networks and data center networking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

18.1 Introduction to converged networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
18.1.1 Migration to a converged network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
18.1.2 Process and benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
18.1.3 Converged switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
18.2 IBM Unified Fabric Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
18.2.1 Unified Fabric Architecture overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
18.2.2 IBM Virtual Fabric RackSwitch products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
18.2.3 Networking for IBM Flex Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
18.2.4 Networking for IBM BladeCenter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

Part 5. IBM storage software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

Chapter 19. IBM storage virtualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

19.1 What is storage virtualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
19.1.1 Inefficiencies in sharing storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

x IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250TOC.fm

19.1.2 Benefits of implementing storage virtualization in your SAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

19.2 Levels of storage virtualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
19.2.1 Levels in a storage network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
19.2.2 Server, network, or storage subsystem virtualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
19.3 IBM storage approach to virtualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
19.3.1 IBM block aggregation characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
19.3.2 IBM file aggregation characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
19.4 IBM storage virtualization family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
19.4.1 Storage virtualization tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
19.4.2 Products for storage virtualization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
19.5 IBM Virtualization technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
19.5.1 Abstraction of physical disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
19.5.2 Thin provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
19.5.3 Volume mirroring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
19.5.4 Easy Tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
19.5.5 FlashCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
19.5.6 Metro Mirror and Global Mirror Copy Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
19.6 More information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

Chapter 20. IBM SAN Volume Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

20.1 IBM SAN Volume Controller: Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
20.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
20.1.2 Design intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
20.2 New features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
20.2.1 New features in SAN Volume Controller 7.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
20.2.2 New features in SAN Volume Controller 7.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
20.2.3 New features in SAN Volume Controller 7.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
20.3 SAN Volume Controller architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
20.3.1 SAN Volume Controller hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
20.3.2 SAN Volume Controller features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
20.4 SAN Volume Controller virtualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
20.5 SAN Volume Controller iSCSI host attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
20.5.1 Sample configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
20.5.2 Supported iSCSI host attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
20.6 SAN Volume Controller software licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
20.7 SAN Volume Controller solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
20.7.1 Business continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
20.7.2 Infrastructure simplification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
20.8 SAN Volume Controller compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
20.9 SAN Volume Controller commonly used terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
20.10 More information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

Chapter 21. IBM Tivoli Storage Manager overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521

21.1 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
21.2 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
21.2.1 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager architectural components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
21.2.2 How client data is stored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
21.2.3 How the server manages storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
21.2.4 Tivoli Storage Manager backup and archive concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
21.2.5 Progressive incremental backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
21.2.6 Tivoli Monitoring for Tivoli Storage Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
21.2.7 Tivoli Storage Manager Administration Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
21.2.8 Tivoli Storage Manager API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539

Contents xi
5250TOC.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

21.2.9 Tivoli Storage Manager security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540

21.3 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager family of products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
21.3.1 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
21.3.2 Application-aware and virtual machine optimized agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
21.3.3 Associated third-party products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
21.4 Tivoli Storage Manager and tape vaulting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
21.4.1 Electronic tape vaulting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
21.4.2 Remote disk mirroring and tape vaulting solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
21.4.3 Collocation considerations for off-site vaulting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
21.4.4 Reclamation considerations for off-site vaulting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
21.5 More information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

Chapter 22. IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

22.1 Product overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
22.1.1 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
22.1.2 Key concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
22.2 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center V5.2 and V5.2.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
22.2.1 Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
22.3 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center new features, functions, and enhancements . . . 571
22.3.1 New features for Tivoli Storage Productivity Center for Replication . . . . . . . . . 574
22.3.2 Version 5.2: New features, functions, and enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
22.4 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center V5.2.4 summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
22.4.1 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
22.4.2 Differences between the Tivoli Storage Productivity Center and the
Virtual Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
22.4.3 Comparison of IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center, Storage Hypervisor, and
Tivoli Storage Productivity Center Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
22.5 Web-based GUI enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
22.5.1 Add resources for monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
22.5.2 Monitoring the performance of resources in the web-based GUI . . . . . . . . . . . 581
22.5.3 Cloud configuration in the web-based GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
22.5.4 Provisioning in the web-based GUI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
22.5.5 Identifying hot spots in the web-based GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
22.5.6 Retiering volumes in the web-based GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
22.5.7 Balancing pools in the web-based GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
22.5.8 Transforming storage in the web-based GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
22.5.9 Managing data collection jobs in the web-based GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
22.5.10 Reports in the web-based GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
22.5.11 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
22.5.12 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center Cinder driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
22.5.13 Help function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
22.6 Installation changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
22.7 VMware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
22.7.1 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center VASA Provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
22.8 Agentless Server Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
22.9 Cognos reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
22.10 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center for Replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
22.10.1 New session type for IBM SAN Volume Controller and IBM Storwize . . . . . . 588
22.11 Performance Management Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
22.11.1 Performance management panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
22.11.2 Performance charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
22.11.3 Using performance charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
22.11.4 Constraint violation report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602

xii IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250TOC.fm

22.11.5 New performance capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603

22.11.6 Tivoli Common Reporting and Cognos performance management reports . . 611
22.12 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center Service Management Community. . . . . . . . . . . 616

Chapter 23. IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617

23.1 Introduction to data encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
23.2 Encryption key lifecycle management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
23.3 IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
23.3.1 New features in IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager 2.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
23.3.2 Tape encryption methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
23.3.3 Key serving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
23.4 Summary of key features and benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
23.4.1 More information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630

Part 6. IBM z/OS storage management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631

Chapter 24. Data management with the DFSMS V2.1 release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
24.1 DFSMS highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
24.2 DFSMSdfp enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
24.2.1 VSAM RLS enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
24.2.2 VSAM non-RLS enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
24.2.3 z/OS catalog modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
24.2.4 IBAM enhancements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
24.2.5 PDSE enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
24.2.6 EAV enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
24.2.7 OAM enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
24.2.8 zFS enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
24.2.9 DADSM CVAF/DEVICE enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
24.2.10 SDM enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
24.2.11 SMS/ISMF enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
24.3 DFSMS components and enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
24.3.1 DFSMSdss enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
24.3.2 DFSMShsm enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
24.3.3 DFSMSrmm enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641

Chapter 25. z/OS Storage Management Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643

25.1 IBM Tivoli Omegamon XE V5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
25.2 IBM DB2 Cloning Tool V3.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
25.3 IBM Tivoli Advanced Catalog Management for z/OS 2.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
25.3.1 Infrastructure benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
25.3.2 Application benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
25.4 IBM Tivoli Advanced Backup and Recovery V2.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
25.4.1 Infrastructure benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
25.4.2 Application benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
25.5 IBM Tivoli Advanced Audit for DFSMShsm V2.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
25.6 IBM Tivoli Automated Tape Allocation Manager V3.3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
25.6.1 ATAM benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
25.6.2 ATAM features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
25.7 IBM Tivoli Advanced Allocation Manager for z/OS V3.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
25.7.1 Product benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
25.7.2 Product features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654

Appendix A. High Performance Storage System (HPSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655

A.1 Introduction to HPSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656

Contents xiii
5250TOC.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

A.2 HPSS technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657

A.2.1 HPSS capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
A.2.2 HPSS interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
A.3 HPSS supported environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
A.4 More information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666

Appendix B. Withdrawn products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669

Related publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671

IBM Redbooks publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Online resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
Help from IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673

xiv IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250spec.fm

Notices

This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.

IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries. Consult
your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any
reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product,
program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not
infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to
evaluate and verify the operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document. The
furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in
writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing, IBM Corporation, North Castle Drive, Armonk, NY 10504-1785 U.S.A.

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such
provisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION
PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of
express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made
to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make
improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time
without notice.

Any references in this information to non-IBM websites are provided for convenience only and do not in any
manner serve as an endorsement of those websites. The materials at those websites are not part of the
materials for this IBM product and use of those websites is at your own risk.

IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring
any obligation to you.

Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products, their published
announcements or other publicly available sources. IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the
accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM products. Questions on the
capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products.

This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations. To illustrate them
as completely as possible, the examples include the names of individuals, companies, brands, and products.
All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business
enterprise is entirely coincidental.

COPYRIGHT LICENSE:

This information contains sample application programs in source language, which illustrate programming
techniques on various operating platforms. You may copy, modify, and distribute these sample programs in
any form without payment to IBM, for the purposes of developing, using, marketing or distributing application
programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating platform for which the sample
programs are written. These examples have not been thoroughly tested under all conditions. IBM, therefore,
cannot guarantee or imply reliability, serviceability, or function of these programs.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999, 2015. All rights reserved. xv

5250spec.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Trademarks
IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. These and other IBM trademarked terms are
marked on their first occurrence in this information with the appropriate symbol (® or ™), indicating US
registered or common law trademarks owned by IBM at the time this information was published. Such
trademarks may also be registered or common law trademarks in other countries. A current list of IBM
trademarks is available on the web at http://www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml

The following terms are trademarks of the International Business Machines Corporation in the United States,
other countries, or both:
Active Cloud Engine® IBM® PureApplication®
AIX® IBM Cloud Managed Services™ PureData®
AIX 5L™ IBM Elastic Storage™ PureFlex®
Blue Gene/L® IBM FlashCore™ PureSystems®
CICS® IBM FlashSystem® Rational®
Cognos® IBM Flex System® Real-time Compression™
Concert™ IBM Flex System Manager® Real-time Compression Appliance®
DB2® IBM PureData™ Redbooks®
DB2 Universal Database™ IBM SmartCloud® Redpaper™
Domino® IBM Spectrum™ Redbooks (logo) ®
DS4000® IBM Spectrum Storage™ S/390®
DS5000™ IBM z™ SANergy®
DS6000™ IMS™ ServicePac®
DS8000® Informix® Storwize®
Easy Tier® Jazz™ SysBack®
ECKD™ Linear Tape File System™ System i®
Enterprise Storage Server® Lotus® System i5®
Express® MicroLatency® System p®
Express Storage™ OMEGAMON® System p5®
FICON® OS/400® System Storage®
FileNet® POWER® System Storage DS®
FlashCopy® Power Systems™ SystemMirror®
FlashSystem™ POWER6® Tivoli®
GDPS® POWER6+™ Tivoli Storage Manager FastBack®
Global Business Services® POWER7® Variable Stripe RAID™
Global Technology Services® POWER7 Systems™ WebSphere®
GPFS™ POWER7+™ XIV®
HACMP™ POWER8™ z/OS®
HiperSockets™ PowerHA® z/VM®
HyperFactor® PowerPC® z/VSE®
HyperSwap® PowerVM® z10™
i5/OS™ ProtecTIER® zEnterprise®

The following terms are trademarks of other companies:

Netezza, and N logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM International Group B.V., an IBM
Company.

SoftLayer, and SoftLayer device are trademarks or registered trademarks of SoftLayer, Inc., an IBM Company.

Intel, Intel Xeon, Intel logo, Intel Inside logo, and Intel Centrino logo are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.

ITIL is a registered trademark, and a registered community trademark of The Minister for the Cabinet Office,
and is registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office.

Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both.

Linear Tape-Open, LTO, Ultrium, the LTO Logo and the Ultrium logo are trademarks of HP, IBM Corp. and
Quantum in the U.S. and other countries.

xvi IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250spec.fm

Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States,
other countries, or both.

Java, and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its
affiliates.

UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.

Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.

Notices xvii
5250spec.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

xviii IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250itsoad.fm
IBM REDBOOKS PROMOTIONS

IBM Redbooks promotions

Find and read thousands of

IBM Redbooks publications
Search, bookmark, save and organize favorites
Get up-to-the-minute Redbooks news and announcements
Link to the latest Redbooks blogs and videos

Get the latest version of the Redbooks Mobile App

Download
Android
iOS

Now

Promote your business

in an IBM Redbooks
publication
®
Place a Sponsorship Promotion in an IBM
®
Redbooks publication, featuring your business
or solution with a link to your web site.

Qualified IBM Business Partners may place a full page

promotion in the most popular Redbooks publications.
Imagine the power of being seen by users who download ibm.com/Redbooks
millions of Redbooks publications each year! About Redbooks Business Partner Programs
Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250itsoad.fm

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250pref.fm

Preface

The IBM® System Storage® Solutions Handbook helps you solve your current and future
data storage business requirements to achieve enhanced storage efficiency by design to
allow managed cost, capacity of growth, greater mobility, and stronger control over storage
performance and management. It describes the most current IBM storage products, including
IBM FlashSystem™, disk, and tape, and virtualized solutions such IBM Storage Cloud, IBM
SmartCloud® Virtual Storage Center, and IBM Spectrum™ Storage.

This IBM Redbooks® publication provides overviews and pointers for information about the
most current IBM System Storage products, showing how IBM delivers the right mix of
products for nearly every aspect of business continuance and business efficiency. IBM
storage products can help you store, safeguard, retrieve, and share your data.

The following topics are covered:

 Part 1 introduces IBM storage solutions. It provides overviews of the IBM storage
solutions, including IBM Spectrum Storage™, IBM Storage Cloud, IBM SmartCloud
Virtual Storage Center (VSC), and the IBM PureSystems® products.
 Part 2 describes the IBM disk and flash products that include IBM DS Series (entry-level,
midrange, and enterprise offerings), IBM XIV® storage, IBM Storwize® products, and the
IBM FlashSystem offerings.
 Part 3 presents an overview of the IBM tape drives, IBM tape automation products, and
IBM tape virtualization solutions and products.
 Part 4 describes storage networking infrastructure, switches and directors to form SAN
solutions, and converged networks and data center networking.
 Part 5 describes the IBM storage software portfolio, including IBM SAN Volume Controller,
IBM Tivoli® Storage Manager, Tivoli Storage Productivity Center, and IBM Security Key
Lifecycle Manager.
 Part 6 describes the IBM z/OS® storage management software and tools.
 The appendixes provide information about the High Performance Storage System (HPSS)
and recently withdrawn IBM storage products.

This book is intended as a reference for basic and comprehensive information about the IBM
Storage products portfolio. It provides a starting point for establishing your own enterprise
storage environment.

Note: This book, previously published in 2013, has since been extensively updated for the
2015 edition.

Authors
This book was produced by a team of specialists from around the world working at the
International Technical Support Organization, Tucson Center.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999, 2015. All rights reserved. xxi

5250pref.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Ezgi Coskun is a Techline Storage Specialist at IBM Turkey.

She provides presales support for entitled Business Partners,
distributors, and IBM sales teams in the Middle East, Africa,
and Europe. She has over 3 years of IT experience. She holds
a bachelors degree in Control Engineering from Istanbul
Technical University.

Pauli Rämö is an IBM Certified Senior IT specialist, working as

Unix and open systems storage specialist in ITS in Finland. He
has been with IBM for 16 years. He has 22 years of experience
in IBM AIX® and high-availability clusters, and 15 years of
experience in open systems storage management. He is
serving as an elected member of the IBM Nordic Technical
Experts Council, which is an affiliate of the IBM Academy of
Technology.

Renato Santos is the storage Technical Advisor for IBM Brazil.

He has worked as a Senior Service Specialist, IBM Level 1
Storage Support Specialist, an XIV certified administrator, IBM
ProtecTIER® certified Level 3 Support Specialist, and an
alternate Storage Customer Support Manager for Brazil. He
has worked at IBM for 19 years. Renato holds an MBA in
Management from Fundação Getulio Vargas (FGV) and a
bachelor's degree in Computer Science from Estacio
University.

Rucel F. Javier is an Infrastructure Architect working in the

IBM Global Technology Services® - Service Delivery
organization at IBM Philippines. He has 14 years of IT
experience and has been working with IBM Philippines in
various roles since 2000 in both IBM GTS and IBM Systems
and Technology Group. Rucel is an IBM Certified Specialist for
System X and Midrange Storage. He has authored two
Redbooks publications, IBM System Storage N series Software
Guide, SG24-7129 and Implementing IBM Storage Data
Deduplication Solutions, SG24-7888. He holds a bachelor
degree of Computer Engineering from Rizal Technological
University.

Megan Gilge is a Project Leader in the IBM International

Technical Support Organization. Before joining the ITSO 3
years ago, she was an Information Developer in the IBM
Semiconductor Solutions and User Technologies areas for 8
years. Megan holds a B.A. in Liberal Arts from Michigan
Technological University and an M.A. in English from Saint
Louis University.

Thanks to the following people for their contributions to this project:

xxii IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250pref.fm

Larry Coyne
Karen Orlando
International Technical Support Organization, Tucson Center

Michael Diederich
Michael Taylor
IBM Systems

Thanks to the authors of the previous editions of this book.

 Authors of the tenth edition, IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook, published in May,
2013 were:
Karen Orlando
Libor Miklas
Jack Arnold
John Khazraee
Mikael Lindstrom
Hrvoje Stanilovic

Now you can become a published author, too!

Here’s an opportunity to spotlight your skills, grow your career, and become a published
author—all at the same time! Join an ITSO residency project and help write a book in your
area of expertise, while honing your experience using leading-edge technologies. Your efforts
will help to increase product acceptance and customer satisfaction, as you expand your
network of technical contacts and relationships. Residencies run from two to six weeks in
length, and you can participate either in person or as a remote resident working from your
home base.

Find out more about the residency program, browse the residency index, and apply online at:
ibm.com/redbooks/residencies.html

Comments welcome
Your comments are important to us!

We want our books to be as helpful as possible. Send us your comments about this book or
other IBM Redbooks publications in one of the following ways:
 Use the online Contact us review Redbooks form found at:
ibm.com/redbooks
 Send your comments in an email to:
[email protected]
 Mail your comments to:
IBM Corporation, International Technical Support Organization
Dept. HYTD Mail Station P099
2455 South Road
Poughkeepsie, NY 12601-5400

Preface xxiii
5250pref.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Stay connected to IBM Redbooks

 Find us on Facebook:
http://www.facebook.com/IBMRedbooks
 Follow us on Twitter:
http://twitter.com/ibmredbooks
 Look for us on LinkedIn:
http://www.linkedin.com/groups?home=&gid=2130806
 Explore new Redbooks publications, residencies, and workshops with the IBM Redbooks
weekly newsletter:
https://www.redbooks.ibm.com/Redbooks.nsf/subscribe?OpenForm
 Stay current on recent Redbooks publications with RSS Feeds:
http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/rss.html

xxiv IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250p01.fm

Part 1

Part 1 IBM storage solutions

Part 1 introduces the building blocks of the IBM storage, IBM Spectrum Scale, and IBM
System Networking solutions. This part includes various products for small to medium
business enablements and complete solutions for enterprise-class, complex data centers.

It provides details about the IBM Smarter Storage Cloud as a range of flexible storage
virtualization solutions and appliances that can help alleviate data storage challenges by
enabling quick implementation of highly scalable, global, clustered network-attached storage
systems. It discusses these products and illustrates their use.

Also included is an overview of IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center, which offers both a
storage virtualization platform and capabilities for storage virtualization management,
SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center V5.1.

In addition, this part describes IBM PureFlex® System and IBM Flex System®. It highlights
the technology and features of the chassis, compute nodes, management features, and
connectivity options. Guidance is provided about every major component, and about
networking and storage connectivity.

Part 1 contains the following information:

 Chapter 1, “Introduction to IBM storage” on page 3
 Chapter 2, “IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center” on page 25
 Chapter 3, “IBM storage cloud solutions” on page 47
 Chapter 4, “IBM PureSystems overview” on page 71
 Chapter 5, “IBM Spectrum Scale” on page 93

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999, 2015. All rights reserved. 1

5250p01.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

2 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch01_Intro.fm

Chapter 1. Introduction to IBM storage

This chapter presents an introduction to the publication as a whole. Subsequent chapters are
organized under parts according to the specific topics.

In this era of high storage demand, the amount of information that most organizations deal
with daily doubles as often as every two years. At the same time, big data projects can quickly
double or triple this volume of information. Information is becoming more valuable, with the
ability to analyze it counting as a competitive advantage. To stay ahead, organizations need
faster access to more data at the same time. Inflexible infrastructures with increasing
complexity can create significant obstacles for organizations that are trying to take advantage
of these tremendous opportunities.

These growing demands require a new approach to storage a more intelligent, more efficient,
more automated approach that fundamentally changes the way we think about it. Storage
agility and efficiency for today's applications is aimed for Cloud, Analytics, Security, Mobile,
and Social applications.

IBM storage products can help deliver the solutions that are required to implement a dynamic
infrastructure. Such solutions include the following capabilities:
 Smarter information infrastructure
 Storage virtualization
 Space efficiency and reduced storage footprint in data centers
 Energy efficiency
 Data protection, information security, and resiliency
 Service and information management
 Strategic outsourcing

This book provides an overview of how IBM storage solutions meet such requirements.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999, 2015. All rights reserved. 3

5250_Ch01_Intro.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

1.1 Why IBM Storage

The emergence of social, mobile, cloud, big data, and analytics is fundamentally changing
how we live, work, and interact. As a consequence, these trends are also changing what
organizations and consumers expect, and demand, from businesses of all sizes. Data is now
coming from everywhere, including sensors, social media, and the mobile world, in addition to
traditional applications. This mountain of data, if properly used, can create tremendous
competitive advantage.

IBM is a market leader in the storage industry. The IBM storage solutions offer excellent
performance, innovative technology, and open standards. IBM storage solutions help you to
manage information growth more effectively, dramatically improve service levels, lower costs
that are associated with the energy consumption and footprint, mitigate risks, and extract new
intelligence for business insight.

1.2 Overview of the IBM storage solutions

Figure 1-1 presents an overview of IBM storage solutions.

Optimized Storage Systems Storage

Built-In
Innovations For Enterprise Workloads Management
Software
SVC Storage
Virtualization IBM
Spectrum
DS8870 XIV Gen3 SONAS FlashSystem
Storage
Easy Tier

For Midrange and Entry Workloads

IBM Real-Time Tivoli Storage
Compression Productivity
Center
Active Cloud Storwize Storwize Storwize DCS 3700
EngineTM V7000/Unified V5000 V3700
Tivoli Storage
FlashCopy
ProtecTIER For Data Protection and Retention Manager
Deduplication

Linear Tape Security

File System Key
Tape drives Tape Library Tape Automation Tape Virtualization
(LTFS) Lifecycle
LTO 4, 5, 6 TS3310 TS3500 / TS4500 TS7720/TS7740
Manager

Integrated Solutions Tivoli Storage

IBM Smart
Analytics Manager Storage Manager 6

PureSystem
Virtual Storage Center Solutions

Figure 1-1 Overview of IBM storage products

For the most current storage offerings, see the following links:
 IBM System Storage - Data storage
http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage
 IBM System Storage interactive product guide
http://public.dhe.ibm.com/common/ssi/ecm/ts/en/tso00364usen/TSO00364USEN.PDF

4 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch01_Intro.fm

1.3 IBM Spectrum Storage family

Software-defined storage transforms data economics for traditional and next-generation
applications with greater speed, agility, and efficiency, all delivered through software. At the
same time, it maintains the required security and reliability that are essential for
business-critical data. IBM Spectrum Storage is a software family that is designed to deliver
simplified storage capacity and services with proven advanced functions and extreme ease of
management.

The IBM Spectrum Storage family is based on proven technologies and designed specifically
to simplify storage management, scale to keep up with data growth, and optimize data
economics. It represents a new, more agile way of storing data, and helps organizations
prepare themselves for new storage demands and workloads. The software defined storage
solutions included in the IBM Spectrum Storage family can help organizations simplify their
storage infrastructures, cut costs, and start gaining more business value from their data.

IBM Spectrum Storage provides the following benefits:

 Simplify and integrate storage management and data protection across traditional and
new applications
 Deliver elastic scalability with high performance for analytics, big data, social, and mobile
 Unify silos to deliver data without borders with built-in hybrid cloud support
 Optimize data economics with intelligent data tiering from flash to tape and cloud
 Build on open architectures that support industry standards that include OpenStack and
Hadoop

For more information, see the following website:

http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/spectrum/index.html

1.3.1 IBM Spectrum Virtualize

IBM Spectrum Virtualize is an industry-leading storage virtualization product that enhances
existing storage to improve resource utilization and productivity to achieve a simpler, more
scalable and cost-efficient IT infrastructure.

The functionality of IBM Spectrum Virtualize is provided by IBM SAN Volume Controller. For
more information, see Chapter 20, “IBM SAN Volume Controller” on page 491.

1.3.2 IBM Spectrum Scale

IBM Spectrum Scale is a new software defined storage solution from IBM. It is a
high-performance enterprise platform for optimizing data and file management. It simplifies
data management with integrated tools designed to help organizations manage petabytes of
data and billions of files.

It provides world-class storage management with extreme scalability, flash accelerated

performance, and automatic policy-based storage tiering from flash through disk to tape. IBM
Spectrum Scale provides fast data access and simple, cost effective data management. It
also provides enhanced security by protecting data from any unauthorized access and
achieves greater IT agility by being able to quickly react, provision, and redeploy resources in
response to new requirements.

Chapter 1. Introduction to IBM storage 5

5250_Ch01_Intro.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

IBM Spectrum Scale allows a group of computers concurrent access to a common set of file
data over a storage area network (SAN) infrastructure, a TCP/IP network, or a mix of
connection types. The computers can run a mix of IBM AIX, Linux, or Microsoft Windows
operating systems.

IBM Spectrum Scale provides models of usage the following basic delivery models, which can
be mixed as required to suit your business:
 Cloud-based delivery model
 Software-based delivery model
 Hardware-based delivery model

For more information, see Chapter 5, “IBM Spectrum Scale” on page 93.

1.3.3 IBM Spectrum Accelerate

IBM Spectrum Accelerate is a software defined storage solution, which is born of the proven
XIV integrated storage offering, which designed to help speed delivery of data across the
organization and add extreme flexibility to cloud deployments.

IBM Spectrum Accelerate delivers hotspot-free performance, easy management scaling, and
proven enterprise functionality such as advanced mirroring and flash caching to different
deployment platforms.

For more information, see the IBM Spectrum Accelerate website:

http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/spectrum/accelerate/

For more information about IBM XIV storage, see 8.4, “IBM XIV Storage System” on
page 225.

1.3.4 IBM Spectrum Control

IBM Spectrum Control provides efficient infrastructure management for virtualized, cloud, and
software-defined storage to simplify and automate storage provisioning, capacity
management, availability monitoring, and reporting.

The functionality of IBM Spectrum Control is provided by IBM Data and Storage Management
Solutions.

For more information, see the IBM Data Management and Storage Management website:

http://www.ibm.com/software/tivoli/csi/cloud-storage/

1.3.5 IBM Spectrum Protect

IBM Spectrum Protect enables reliable, efficient data protection and resiliency for
software-defined, virtual, physical, and cloud environments.

The functionality of IBM Spectrum Protect is provided by IBM Backup and Recovery
Solutions.

For more information, see the IBM data protection and data recovery website:

http://www.ibm.com/software/tivoli/csi/backup-recovery/

Also see Chapter 21, “IBM Tivoli Storage Manager overview” on page 521.

6 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch01_Intro.fm

1.3.6 IBM Spectrum Archive

IBM Spectrum Archive enables you to automatically move infrequently accessed data from
disk to tape so you can lower costs while retaining ease of use and without the need for
proprietary tape applications.

The functionality of IBM Spectrum Archive is provided by IBM Linear Tape File System™.

For more information, see 12.2.3, “IBM Linear Tape File System (LTFS) software application”
on page 301.

Also see the following website:

http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/tape/ltfs/index.html

1.4 IBM Storage Cloud

Storage cloud has redefined the way storage consumers can do business, especially those
who have seasonal or unpredictable capacity requirements, and those requiring rapid
deployment or contraction of storage capacity. Storage cloud can help them focus more on
their core business and worry less about supporting a storage infrastructure for their data.
Here are the advantages:
 Facilitates rapid capacity provisioning to support business agility
 Improves storage utilization by avoiding unused capacity
 Supports storage consolidation and storage virtualization functionality
 Chargeback and showback accounting for usage as incentive to conserve resources

Storage cloud helps companies to become more flexible and agile, and supports their growth.
Improvement in quality of service (QoS), by automating provisioning and management of
underlying complex storage infrastructure, helps improve the overall efficiency of IT storage.
Cloud features such as deduplication, compression, automatic tiering, and data migration
capabilities are generally built-in options and also support the optimizing of storage costs by
implementing tiered storage.

Often the growth in file-based systems is restricted to approximately a few terabytes (TB); this
restriction can be easily overcome with storage cloud. Ubiquitous access to data over the
Internet, intranet, or both, provides location-independent access and can provide a single
management platform to manage hundreds of nodes, with data flowing from all the nodes to
all the storage arrays.

Capital expenditure can be reduced with a cloud operational-based, pay-as-you-go model.

Storage clouds can be tailored or services can be acquired to support key storage operations
such as backup and recovery, remote site disaster recovery, archive, or development and test
operations.

Chapter 1. Introduction to IBM storage 7

5250_Ch01_Intro.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Figure 1-2 shows layers that provide unique benefits in the storage cloud.

Figure 1-2 Storage cloud characteristics

IBM Storage Cloud solutions facilitate the growth of data. As the ability to handle various file
formats becomes more complex, supporting efficient and cost-effective access to data can be
increasingly difficult, with users experiencing reduced performance and outages. IBM Storage
Cloud can help you to successfully deploy high-performance, scalable storage-virtualization
solutions to facilitate growth and innovation at lower operational costs.

Allocating the right amount of data storage to the right users at the right time is an ongoing
challenge for organizations of all sizes. The explosive growth of workgroup communities and
multiple data volumes demands efficient and cost-effective interdepartmental data sharing.
Although traditional solutions might offer simplicity, they can lack the crucial scalability to
expand the storage space to serve large user communities.

IBM Storage Cloud offers a storage-virtualization solution that is designed to support your
storage optimization efforts. It can help alleviate your data storage challenges by enabling
rapid implementation of a scalable, global file storage system with flexibility in deployment
and management options. The solution provides virtualized storage to enable storage and
server consolidation, a unified management platform to help reduce outages and storage
management labor demands and costs, and advanced data replication for cost-effective
business continuity and disaster recovery.

For information about how to implement a storage cloud, see Chapter 3, “IBM storage cloud
solutions” on page 47.

1.4.1 Support for the OpenStack platform

OpenStack is a cloud platform that controls large pools of compute, storage, and networking
resources throughout a data center, all managed though a dashboard that gives
administrators control and empowers users to provision resources through a web interface. In
addition to traditional enterprise-class storage technology, many organizations now have
various storage needs with varying performance and price requirements. OpenStack has
support for both Object Storage and Block Storage, with many deployment options for each
depending on the case.

IBM cloud solutions provide robust integration with cloud orchestration platforms via
OpenStack within software Defined Storage (IBM Elastic Storage™) that also automates

8 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch01_Intro.fm

provisioning for VMware, OpenStack, and self-service portals and storage devices such XIV,
that is a high-end disk storage system that stands out for tuning-free predictable high
performance, an exceptional user experience, and excellent data economics, ideal for cloud
and analytics, offering high service levels for dynamic workloads, easy hyper-scaling
including in multi-tenant environments, and flexible consumption models.

For more information, see the IBM Private, Public, and Hybrid Cloud Storage Solutions,
REDP-4873 IBM Redpaper™ publication.

OpenStack object storage capabilities

Object Storage is ideal for cost effective, scale-out storage. It provides a fully distributed,
API-accessible storage platform that can be integrated directly into applications or used for
backup, archiving and data retention.
 OpenStack provides redundant, scalable object storage that uses clusters of standardized
servers that can store petabytes of data
 Object storage is not a traditional file system, but is instead a distributed storage system
for static data such as virtual machine images, photo storage, email storage, backups, and
archives. Having no central “brain” or master point of control provides greater scalability,
redundancy, and durability.
 Objects and files are written to multiple disk drives that are spread throughout servers in
the data center, with the OpenStack software responsible for ensuring data replication and
integrity across the cluster.
 Storage clusters scale horizontally by adding new servers. If a server or hard disk drive
fails, OpenStack replicates its content from other active nodes to new locations in the
cluster. Because OpenStack uses software logic to ensure data replication and distribution
across different devices, inexpensive commodity hard drives and servers can be used in
lieu of more expensive equipment.

OpenStack block storage capabilities

Block storage allows block devices to be accessed and connected to compute instances for
expanded storage, better performance, and integration with enterprise storage platforms.
 OpenStack provides persistent block-level storage devices for use with OpenStack
compute instances.
 The block storage system manages the creation, attaching and detaching of the block
devices to servers. Block storage volumes are fully integrated into OpenStack Compute
and the Dashboard allowing for cloud users to manage their own storage needs.
 In addition to using simple Linux server storage, it has unified storage support for
numerous storage platforms.
 Block storage is appropriate for performance sensitive scenarios such as database
storage, expandable file systems, or providing a server with access to raw block level
storage.
 Snapshot management provides powerful functionality for backing up data that is stored
on block storage volumes. Snapshots can be restored or used to create a new block
storage volume.

For more information, see the following website:

http://www.openstack.org/

Chapter 1. Introduction to IBM storage 9

5250_Ch01_Intro.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

1.4.2 IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center

The SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center helps IT storage managers migrate to an agile
cloud-based storage environment and manage it effectively without having to replace existing
storage systems. This powerful offering removes the physicality of storage and the complexity
that is associated with managing multivendor infrastructures. It ultimately helps businesses to
optimize provisioning, capacity, availability, data protection, reporting, and management for
virtualized storage.

The SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center offers both a storage virtualization platform and
capabilities for storage virtualization management. Cloud Virtual Storage Center V5.1 is one
licensed software product that delivers the complete set of advanced functions that are
available in IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center, all functions that are available with the
virtualization, remote-mirroring, and IBM FlashCopy® capabilities of IBM SAN Volume
Controller, and all the capabilities of IBM Tivoli Storage FlashCopy Manager.

SmartCloud VSC V5.2 offers the following advanced capabilities:

 Support for Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) protocol that allows use of converged
data center infrastructures.
 Nondisruptive volume migration among SAN Volume Controller nodes that helps
maximize configuration flexibility.
 A next-generation, web-based management interface that is designed to offer ease of use.
The new user interface provides quick access to key storage asset, status, and
performance information, and is based on the interface in the current IBM XIV Storage
System and other IBM storage systems.
 IBM Cognos®-based reporting that helps create and integrate custom reports on capacity,
performance, and utilization.
 Enhanced tiered storage capacity optimization capabilities that support varying
optimization goals and automated relocation of storage and tier usage goals and provide
policy-based relocation recommendations and reports.
 The ability to perform automated discovery and provisioning of file systems with IBM Scale
Out Network Attached Storage (SONAS) and IBM Storwize V7000 Unified.
 An InstallAnywhere wizard to help simplify installation and postinstallation configuration to
help accelerate your time-to-value.
 Optional separate licensing available for the integrated IBM real-time compression
capability that enables use of compression for production data.

See Chapter 2, “IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center” on page 25 for more information
about SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center.

1.5 IBM PureSystems

IT is a constant part of business and of our lives. IBM expertise in delivering IT solutions has
helped the planet become smarter. As organizational leaders seek to extract more real value
from their data, business processes, and other key investments, IT is moving to the strategic
center of business.

To meet those business demands, IBM introduced a new category of system, which is
systems that combine the flexibility of general-purpose systems, the elasticity of cloud
computing, and the simplicity of an appliance that is tuned to the workload. Expert integrated
systems are essentially the building blocks of capability. This new category of systems

10 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch01_Intro.fm

represents the collective knowledge of thousands of deployments, established preferred

practices, innovative thinking, IT leadership, and distilled expertise.

The IBM PureSystems offerings are designed to deliver value in the following ways:
 Built-in expertise helps to address complex business and operational tasks automatically.
 Integration by design helps you to tune systems for optimal performance and efficiency.
 The simplified experience, from design to purchase to maintenance, creates efficiencies
quickly.

The IBM PureSystems offerings are optimized for performance and virtualized for efficiency.
These systems offer a no-compromise design with system-level upgradeability. IBM
PureSystems are built for cloud and contain built-in flexibility and simplicity.

There are three types of IBM expert integrated systems:

 IBM PureFlex System: The IBM PureFlex System combines compute, storage, networking
and virtualization capabilities under a single, unified management console into an
infrastructure system that is expert at sensing and anticipating resource needs for your
enterprise
 IBM PureApplication® System: IBM PureApplication System is a cloud application
platform that can dramatically accelerate time-to-value and automate deployment and
lifecycle management for a broad range of applications. The PureApplication flexible
provisioning, takes full advantage of dynamic hybrid cloud options to strategically use on-
and off-premise cloud environments to provide greater opportunities for innovation and
optimization, including middleware and expertise for deploying and managing your
application platforms.
 IBM PureData™ System: The PureData System is optimized exclusively for delivering
data services to the actual demanding analytic applications. The PureData Systems offer
built-in expertise, integration by design, and a simplified experience throughout their
lifecycle. These systems are optimized for transaction processing, reporting analytics, and
operational analytics environments.

For more information about IBM PureSystems products, see Chapter 4, “IBM PureSystems
overview” on page 71.

1.6 IBM storage disk systems

The IBM storage disk systems products and offerings provide storage solutions with superior
value for all levels of business from small and medium business to high-end and enterprise
systems. IBM storage solutions are designed to reduce the cost and complexity of managing
vast amounts of data while improving the productivity of your storage administration staff and
storage space as the volumes of data grow.
IBM offers a range of disk storage systems to meet these demands. Some of the newest
products include the following offerings:
 IBM Storwize V3700, which is an entry level disk system that delivers storage efficiency
and virtualization technologies, exceptional ease of use and performance; all integrated
into a compact, modular design that’s offered at a competitive, entry level price.
 IBM FlexSystem V7000 Storage Node, which is a strategic component of IBM
FlexSystems, providing the storage capacity for IBM FlexSystems computing components.

Chapter 1. Introduction to IBM storage 11

5250_Ch01_Intro.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

 Enterprise storage systems such as the IBM DS8870 and the IBM XIV Gen3 Storage
System, which have capacities up to thousands of terabytes and a range of reliability and
performance features to support the most demanding storage challenges.

For a comprehensive overview of IBM Storage disk subsystems for storage area networks
(SANs) and IP-based networks, see Part 2, “Disk systems” on page 105.

Next, this chapter describes the following products and solutions:

 1.6.1, “Entry-level disk systems”
 1.6.2, “Midrange disk systems” on page 13
 1.6.3, “Enterprise disk systems” on page 13
 1.6.4, “IBM FlashSystem storage” on page 14
 1.6.5, “IBM SONAS” on page 15
 1.6.6, “IBM N series expansion units” on page 15

1.6.1 Entry-level disk systems

Designed to deliver advanced functionality at a breakthrough price, these entry-level systems
provide an exceptional solution for workgroup storage applications such as email, file, print
and web servers, in addition to collaborative databases and remote boot for diskless servers.

IBM Storwize V3700

Based on the innovative architecture design of Storwize V7000, the new Storwize V3700
system provides a powerful, affordable, and efficient storage system, which is designed to
address growing customer data requirements and infrastructure consolidation needs.

The modular and scalable design of the V3700 provides the flexibility to upgrade your storage
with additional disk enclosures as your data needs grow. It also has non-disruptive migration
integrated in the system, which allows you to have near continuous availability.

An extensive set of advanced software features is included:

 Built-in management capabilities with an easy-to-use, embedded graphical user interface
based on the Storwize V7000 interface design
 Internal virtualization and thin provisioning at no extra cost, allowing you to allocate the
exact amount of space that is needed when it is required
 Sophisticated data protection with FlashCopy technology included (up to 64 targets)

IBM Storwize V3700 shows high flexibility of host attachment options, providing the ability to
connect to your iSCSI, Fibre Channel, SAS, and FCoE environments.

For more information, see Chapter 6, “Entry-level disk storage” on page 107

IBM System Storage EXP2500

The EXP2500 is a cost-effective, fully integrated complement to System x and BladeCenter
servers. Offering substantial improvements at a price that will fit most budgets, the IBM
EXP2500 Express® delivers superior price-to-performance ratios, functionality, scalability,
and ease of use for the entry-level storage user.

EXP2500 highlights are as follows:

 Easy installation and management with storage expansion technology designed for IBM
System x and IBM BladeCenter attachment
 Next-generation 6 Gbps Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) host and drive interfaces, which
enable infrastructure simplification

12 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch01_Intro.fm

 Support for flexible high-performance, SSD and nearline disk drive options
 High capacity, with support for multiple enclosures per configuration
 High-density 2U enclosure designed for supporting up to 12 3.5" disk drives on model
EXP2512 Express and 24 2.5" disk drives on model EXP2524 Express

High availability and reliability, with dual AC power supplies and fans

For more information see Chapter 6, “Entry-level disk storage” on page 107

1.6.2 Midrange disk systems

Midrange disk storage products provide convenient solutions for an on demand world.

IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node

IBM Flex System delivers high performance, dense packaging, and integrated management.
When you combine those two solutions, you get IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node. All
the performance, flexibility, ease of use, and function of Storwize V7000 Integrated into the
IBM Flex System.

See 7.2, “IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node” on page 130 for more information.

IBM Storwize V7000

IBM Storwize V7000 and Storwize V7000 Unified are virtualized storage systems to
complement virtualized server environments that provide unmatched performance,
availability, advanced functions, and highly scalable capacity never seen before in midrange
disk systems. Storwize V7000 supports block workloads, whereas Storwize V7000 Unified
consolidates block and file workloads into a single system.

See 7.2, “IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node” on page 130 for more information.

IBM DCS3700
IBM DCS3700 is designed to meet the storage needs of highly scalable, data streaming
applications in high-performance computing environments. “DCS” stands for Deep Computing
Storage. IBM already has the DCS9900 for large enterprise deployments, so this smaller
DCS3700 is targeted for midrange deployments. When combined with the IBM Spectrum
Scale, the DCS3700 storage system can help organizations optimize the flow and
management of large file-based data while retaining ease-of-data access. Combining IBM
Spectrum Scale clustered file management software and the DCS3700, creates an extremely
scalable and dense file-based management system.

See 7.4, “IBM System Storage DCS3700” on page 153 for more information.

1.6.3 Enterprise disk systems

The family of IBM Enterprise Disk Systems offers a broad range of scalable solutions to
address various enterprise storage needs. By using IBM leading technology, the Enterprise
Disk Systems provide a significant choice in functionality, performance, and resiliency.

IBM DS8000 family

The IBM DS8000® series is designed for the most demanding, mission critical environments
that require the highest level of availability. The DS8000 series is designed to set an entirely
new industry standard for high performance and high capacity by delivering a dramatic leap in

Chapter 1. Introduction to IBM storage 13

5250_Ch01_Intro.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

performance and scalability. IBM introduced the new IBM DS8870, the most advanced model
in the high-end disk portfolio, with new hardware that offers faster performance and a
significant reduction in floor space and energy requirements.

See 8.1.1, “DS8000 series overview” on page 162 for more information.

IBM XIV Gen3 Storage System

The IBM XIV Storage System is a ground breaking, high-end, open disk system that is
designed to support business requirements for a highly available information infrastructure.
The XIV is also a high-end disk storage system that stands out for tuning-free predictable high
performance, an exceptional user experience, and excellent data economics, ideal for cloud
and analytics, offering high service levels for dynamic workloads, easy hyper-scaling
including in multi-tenant environments, and flexible consumption models. The XIV
architecture is a grid of standard Intel/Linux components that are connected in any-to-any
topology by using a massively paralleled, non-blocking InfiniBand network, providing
outstanding enterprise-class reliability, performance, and scalability.

For more information, see 8.4, “IBM XIV Storage System” on page 225.

1.6.4 IBM FlashSystem storage

IBM FlashSystem storage is an all-flash storage system that is used to make applications and
data centers faster and more efficient. IBM engineers FlashSystem storage with a relentless
focus on lowering latency for data accesses. The value your business gets from an all-flash
system is directly related to its latency. Where competing systems have settled on
< 1-millisecond response times, FlashSystem has latency that is typically 100 - 200
microseconds. IBM calls this short time IBM MicroLatency®. For applications that need to go
fast, MicroLatency matters. OLTP, analytics, virtual desktops, and cloud infrastructures all
perform better with MicroLatency.

The IBM FlashSystem shared flash storage systems offer affordable, high-density, ultra
low-latency, highly reliable, and scalable performance in a storage device that is both space
efficient and power efficient. IBM Flash products, which can either augment or replace
traditional hard disk drive (HDD) storage systems in enterprise environments, empower
applications to work faster and scale further.

In addition to optimizing performance, the IBM FlashSystem family helps bring enterprise
reliability and macro efficiency to the most demanding data centers so that businesses can
see the following benefits:
 Reduce customer complaints by improving application response time
 Service more users with less hardware
 Reduce I/O wait and response ties of critical applications
 simplify solutions
 Reduce power and floor space requirements
 Speed up applications, therefore enhancing the pace of business
 Improve the utilization of existing infrastructure
 Extend existing infrastructure
 Mitigate risk

FlashSystem V9000 offers the advantages of software-defined storage at the speed of flash.
These all-flash storage systems deliver the full capabilities of the hardware-accelerated I/O
provided by FlashCore Technology. FlashSystem V9000 also delivers the enterprise reliability
of MicroLatency modules and advanced flash management, coupled with a rich set of the
features found in the most advanced software-defined storage solutions. These include IBM

14 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch01_Intro.fm

Real-time Compression™, dynamic tiering, thin provisioning, snapshots, cloning, replication,

data copy services and high-availability configurations.

For more information, see Chapter 9, “IBM FlashSystem storage” on page 273.

1.6.5 IBM SONAS

IBM Scale Out Network Attached Storage (SONAS) is designed to deliver cloud storage in
the petabyte age. It provides fast and cost-effective IT-enabled business enhancements and
delivers storage services that make the supporting technology almost invisible. It can help to
uncouple applications and services from the underlying infrastructure, enabling businesses to
adjust to change quickly. IBM SONAS is a highly scalable system that is designed to provide
a clustered NAS system with a single name space for CIFS, NFS, FTP, HTTP, and SCP
services.

The high-density, high-performance SONAS system can help organizations consolidate and
manage data affordably, reduce crowded floor space, and reduce management expense
associated with administering an excessive number of disparate storage systems. SONAS
virtualizes and consolidates multiple filers into a single, enterprise-wide file system, which can
reduce total cost of ownership, reduce capital expenditure, and enhance operational
efficiency.

For more information and technical details, see Chapter 10, “IBM Scale Out Network
Attached Storage (SONAS)” on page 283.

1.6.6 IBM N series expansion units

The IBM N series provides network access protocols such as Network File System (NFS),
Common Internet File System (CIFS), HTTP, FTP, and iSCSI, in addition to storage area
network (SAN) technologies such as Fibre Channel (FC) and Fibre Channel Over Ethernet
(FCoE).

IBM has withdrawn the N series storage controller, features, and function authorization from
marketing. However, expansion shelves are availaible for ordering.

For more information, see Chapter 11, “IBM System Storage N series expansion units” on
page 287.

1.7 IBM tape systems

Part 3, “Tape systems” on page 291 reviews IBM tape drives, IBM tape automation products,
and IBM tape virtualization products. Newer IBM tape products and updated solutions include
the following things:
 IBM Ultrium LTO Generation 6 tape drives provide double capacity of tape cartridges for
small to medium business and enterprise-class backup and archiving solutions.
 IBM ProtecTIER deduplication gateways and appliances now offer File System Interface
(FSI) to connect your repository using the CIFS protocol.

This part also describes the following about of the following products:
 IBM tape drives
 IBM tape automation products (automated tape libraries and autoloaders)
 Tape virtualization products
 Complimentary tape products

Chapter 1. Introduction to IBM storage 15

5250_Ch01_Intro.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

1.7.1 IBM tape drives

IBM invented the concept of magnetic tape computer storage in 1952. Since then, IBM has
delivered many innovations in tape storage. That innovation continues today.

IBM LTO tape drives

Linear Tape-Open (LTO) is an open format technology. It means that users can have multiple
sources of products and media. The LTO technology establishes a new open format
specification for high-capacity, high-performance storage products and addresses a growing
client need for improved data interchange across platforms.

The IBM LTO Ultrium family of tape drives is composed of the following products:
 IBM TS2240 Tape Drive Express Model
 IBM TS2250 Tape Drive Express Model
 IBM TS2260 Tape Drive Express Model
 IBM TS2340 Tape Drive Express Model
 IBM TS2350 Tape Drive Express Model
 IBM TS2360 Tape Drive Express Model

Enterprise tape drives

The IBM Enterprise tape drives (type 3592 family) offer a design focused on performance,
high capacity, and high reliability for storing mission-critical data. Ever since the introduction
of the first generation family of tape drives, IBM has advanced its high-end half-inch cartridge
tape technology to a new level. The IBM 3592 tape drive family has been enlarged and
improved with the addition of the IBM TS1140 tape drive and IBM TS1150 tape drive. The
IBM TS1140 and the IBM TS11150 tape drives are the new of the 3592 family, which provides
the unprecedented capacity of 4 TB t up to 10 TB of uncompressed data on a single tape, and
new levels of performance.

For more information, see 12.4, “IBM TS1100 tape drive family” on page 308.

1.7.2 Tape automation products

IBM storage includes a complete spectrum of tape libraries with high performance and
capacity for entry, midrange, and enterprise systems. The IBM libraries handle backups, save
and restore, and archival data storage needs with minimal or even no manual intervention of
on-site personnel.

This publication describes the following models:

 IBM TS3100 tape library
The IBM TS3100 tape library is well-suited for handling backup, save and restore, and
archival data-storage needs for small to medium-size environments. It has a single Ultrium
3 tape drive and 22 tape-cartridge capacity.
 IBM TS3200 tape library
The IBM TS3200 tape library is designed for backup, save and restore, and archival
data-storage needs for small to medium-size environments. The TS3200 is an external 4U
stand-alone or rack-mountable unit that incorporates up to two Ultrium 3 tape drives and
44 tape cartridges, as well as 3 media mail slots and 1 dedicated cleaning cartridge slot.
 IBM TS3310 tape library
The IBM TS3310 tape library offers simple, rapid expansion as processing needs grow. Its
entry-level configuration is a single 5 Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) rack unit high
library. Over time, as the need for tape backup expands, you can add an additional 9U

16 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch01_Intro.fm

expansion module, with space for additional cartridges, tape drives and a redundant
power supply.
 IBM TS3500 tape library
The IBM TS3500 tape library combines IBM automation and drive technology to provide a
highly scalable, automated tape library for IBM z™ System and open systems backup and
archive in midrange to enterprise environments.
 IBM TS4500 tape library
The IBM TS4500 tape library, delivers the density that actually and in the future, data
growth requires along with the cost efficiency and the manageability to grow with business
data needs while preserving existing investments in IBM tape library products. Now,
organizations can achieve both a low cost per terabyte (TB) and a high TB density per
square foot. In fact, IBM TS4500 tape library can store up to 5.5 PBs of data in a single 10
square foot library frame, more than three times more capacity than the IBM TS3500 tape
library.

For more information about these entry, midrange, and enterprise tape libraries, see
Chapter 13, “IBM tape automation products” on page 319.

1.7.3 Tape virtualization from IBM

A virtual tape library provides high performance backup and restore by using disk arrays and
virtualization software. A virtual tape library is a unique blend of several storage tiers. The life
cycle of data from its creation at the server level migrates by backup software to a virtual tape
library. There is no better place for the data to be, because the virtual tape library is a
combination of high performance SAN-attached disk and high performance servers emulating
a tape storage device. At this level, you have many options for the data. For example, the data
can remain on the virtual tape library indefinitely, as long as there is enough space, or it can
be migrated to tape for off-site storage, archive, or both.

Each IBM tape virtualization product is the combination of IBM hardware and software
designed to provide backup/recovery operations with the performance benefits of Fibre
Channel, iSCSI, or Serial Attached SCSI (SAS). IBM tape virtualization products are able to
emulate all currently known tape libraries and tape drives including IBM TS3100, IBM
TS3200, IBM TS3400, IBM TS3310, IBM TS3500 tape libraries and tape drives either Ultrium
LTO or 3592 models. The latest model IBM Virtualization Engine TS7700 and its software
release R1.6 introduce the support for Logical WORM cartridges (LWORM).

TS7620 ProtecTIER Deduplication Appliance

The IBM TS7620 ProtecTIER Deduplication Appliance Express provides fast, reliable, and
easy-to-deploy backup and recovery for midsized IT environments. Available in two
configuration options (4 TB and 5.5 TB), the IBM TS7620 ProtecTIER Deduplication
Appliance Express provides capacity, price and performance, and RAS features required by
midsized customers.

See 14.5, “TS7620 ProtecTIER Deduplication Appliance Express” on page 368 for details.

TS7650G ProtecTIER Deduplication Gateway

The IBM TS7650G ProtecTIER Deduplication Gateway offers industry-leading inline
deduplication performance and scalability for up to 1 petabyte (PB) of physical storage
capacity per system that can provide up to 25 PB of storage capacity. Combined with IBM
storage, the ProtecTIER Gateway solution provides a powerful disk-based repository to
improve the retention and availability of backup and archive data.

Chapter 1. Introduction to IBM storage 17

5250_Ch01_Intro.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

See 14.4, “TS7650G ProtecTIER Deduplication Gateway” on page 363 for more information.

IBM Virtualization Engine TS7700

The IBM Virtualization Engine TS7700, a member of the IBM TS7000 virtualization family,
provides tape virtualization for the z System environment. As the follow-on product to the
highly successful IBM TotalStorage Virtual Tape Server, the TS7700 Virtualization Engine is
designed to provide improved performance and capacity to help lower the total cost of
ownership for tape processing. It introduces a new modular, scalable, high-performing
architecture for mainframe tape virtualization.

See 14.9, “IBM Data Facility Storage Management Subsystem” on page 381 for more
information.

1.8 Storage area networks

Storage area network (SAN) technology has become extremely important for today’s data
storage. Previously, for client server systems, data was stored directly on internal devices or
directly attached to the server. Optionally, the network attached storage (NAS) took the
storage devices away from the server and connected them directly to the IP-based network.

However, SANs have taken the principle one step further by allowing storage devices to exist
on their own separate network and communicate directly with each other over very fast media
(typically Fibre Channel network). Nowadays, the storage networking allows users to gain
access to their storage devices through server systems that are connected to both the LAN
and the SAN with the similar performance and latency as they are directly attached to the
server. Understanding this technology basics is essential to plan for the best solution.

This publication describes various storage networking options that you can choose to build
your optimal storage environment, enabling the infrastructure simplification as follows:
 Consolidation
 Virtualization
 Automation
 Integration

A brief introduction to the concept of SAN deployments is provided in Chapter 16,

“Introduction to storage networking” on page 395. It describes the key components of SANs,
network topologies, switches, routers, enterprise SAN directors, and simple solutions how to
deploy SAN in your data centers. This publication considers two categories of storage
networking products:
 Fibre Channel based networking
 Converged networks and datacenter networking

1.8.1 Fibre Channel based networking

FC-based SAN switches interconnect multiple host servers with storage servers and devices
to create a SAN. The SAN switches can be used either as stand-alone devices to build a
simple SAN fabric, or they can be interconnected with other switches to build a larger SAN
fabric. Chapter 17, “Storage area network products” on page 421 presents the IBM System
Networking SAN product portfolio, which includes Fibre Channel switches and directors with
Fibre Channel and IBM FICON® ports.

It describes the following entry, midrange, and enterprise level switch products:
 IBM System Networking SAN b-type switches and directors

18 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch01_Intro.fm

 Cisco switches and directors

Entry-level SAN switches

The IBM System Networking SAN switch entry-level products are designed specifically to
address the needs of small to medium-size SAN environments. They can be used to create a
wide range of high-performance SAN solutions, from simple single-switch configurations to
larger multi-switch configurations that support fabric connectivity and advanced business
continuity capabilities.

Infrastructure simplification solutions for IBM System x, IBM System i, and IBM System p
include storage consolidation and high-availability server clustering with IBM Storage disk
systems arrays. Business continuity solutions include data protection with IBM tape libraries
and devices and IBM Tivoli Storage Manager data protection software. IBM entry fabric
switches provide up to 16 Gbps, 24 ports for fully non-blocking performance, and advanced
intelligence features.

Entry-level products include:

 17.2.1, “IBM System Storage SAN24B-4 Express” on page 425
 17.3.1, “IBM System Storage SAN48B-5” on page 428

Midrange SAN switches

IBM midrange SAN solutions provide additional capability, features, and benefits beyond the
simple entry solutions. The IBM System Networking midrange SAN switches provide 1, 2, 4,
8, and 16 Gbps port-to-port non-blocking throughput with auto-sensing capability for
connecting to older 1 Gbps host servers, storage, and switches. They come in 40 to 80 ports
with “Ports on Demand” scalability models.

IBM SAN switches can be used to create dedicated, reliable, and high performance networks
for storage products like disk subsystems, tape drives, and tape drive libraries. In addition, all
of these models are fully interoperable with the previous IBM SAN Switches, and can be
added to existing fabrics, enabling transition from existing Fibre Channel storage networks to
the faster technology.

Midrange SAN switches include the following models:

 17.3.1, “IBM System Storage SAN48B-5” on page 428
 17.3.2, “IBM System Networking SAN96B-5” on page 429
 17.3.3, “Cisco MDS 9148S 16G Multilayer Fabric Switch for IBM System Storage” on
page 430
 17.3.4, “Cisco MDS 9148 for IBM System Storage” on page 431

Enterprise SAN directors

The IBM System Networking SAN switches and directors are well suited to address
enterprise SAN customer requirements for infrastructure simplification and improved
Business Continuity.

The SAN Director is designed to be interoperable with other members of the IBM System
Networking switch family. You can configure a wide range of highly scalable solutions that
address demands for integrated, heterogeneous mainframe and open server enterprise
SANs.

Enterprise products include the following models:

 17.4.1, “IBM System Storage SAN384B-2 and SAN768B-2” on page 432

Chapter 1. Introduction to IBM storage 19

5250_Ch01_Intro.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

 17.4.2, “Cisco MDS 9500 Series Multilayer Directors” on page 434

 17.4.3, “Cisco MDS 9710 Multilayer Director” on page 436

Multiservice Fabric Switch

Since the introduction of storage area networks (SANs), customers have built multiple SAN
networks (or islands) for various applications, often with fabric switch components from
various manufacturers. Certain islands were built by various departments within a company,
while other islands resulted from mergers, acquisitions, or reorganizations. Dissimilar SAN
equipment with various capabilities or a desire to isolate important applications has
constrained opportunities for enhanced infrastructure simplification and vital business
continuity solutions.

The IBM multiprotocol router provides Fibre Channel FC-FC Routing Service, which allows
the interconnection of multiple SAN islands without requiring that the separate fabrics be
merged into a single large SAN. This capability can help create a tiered or extended
enterprise SAN infrastructure without having to redesign or reconfigure the entire
environment.

Section 17.5.4, “Cisco MDS 9250i Multiservice Fabric Switch for IBM System Storage” on
page 442 describes the enterprise offering.

For more information about IBM SAN solutions, see 17.6.1, “Infrastructure simplification
solutions” on page 444.

For additional IBM SAN solution information, see the following website:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/networking/solutions/

Storage networking for IBM PureFlex Systems

The network resources in an IBM PureFlex System are tightly integrated into the system to
support virtualization and simple, integrated management. You can move from managing a
physical network to managing a logical network in a virtualized environment, supporting
business services instead of network components. With integrated management tools based
on open standards, these resources are easy to provision and deploy so you can reduce the
cost of managing your virtual fabric. You have fewer elements to manage, but still get port and
bandwidth flexibility with highly scalable switches. With scalable components, you can buy a
base product and purchase and enable additional ports without adding new hardware.

IBM offers a range of scalable Ethernet solutions for your IBM PureFlex System with 1 Gb,
10 Gb, and 40 Gb (uplink) options. All modules are built using industry standards and
enterprise class features that have a proven record of being able to seamlessly interoperate
with existing infrastructures while also providing capabilities for the future. This publication
introduces the available IBM Flex System switches for IBM PureFlex Systems:
 “IBM Flex System EN2092 1 Gb Ethernet Scalable Switch” on page 458
 “IBM Flex System Fabric EN4093R 10 Gb Scalable Switch” on page 459
 “IBM Flex System EN4091 10Gb Ethernet Pass-Thru Module” on page 462
 “IBM Flex System EN4023 10 Gb Scalable Switch” on page 463
 “Cisco Nexus B22 Fabric Extender for IBM Flex System” on page 464
 “IBM Virtual Fabric 10Gb Switch Module for IBM BladeCenter” on page 465
 “IBM BladeCenter 1/10Gb Uplink Ethernet Switch Module” on page 466
 “IBM BladeCenter Layer 2/3 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Modules” on page 466
 “IBM BladeCenter Layer 2/3 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Modules” on page 466

20 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch01_Intro.fm

1.9 Software solutions for IBM storage

The IBM storage software products are designed with the goal of helping clients drive down
the cost and complexity of storage management while providing greater flexibility to address
rapidly changing storage needs. Part 5, “IBM storage software” on page 469 describes the
following topics:
 Storage virtualization products
 Storage virtualization based on IBM SAN Volume Controller (SVC)
 IBM Tivoli Storage Manager family for efficient backup and archiving solutions
 IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center family for storage management
 IBM Security Key Lifecycle Management for storage encryption

1.9.1 IBM storage virtualization

Storage virtualization products have become widespread in the IT industry. They can exist in
one or more layers in a storage network and can be described as the abstraction of the
physical location of the data from the logical representation of it. The storage virtualization
increases the utilization of existing physical resources and reduces waste of capacity.

Storage virtualization is a general approach to decoupling logical resources from their

physical elements, so that those resources can be allocated faster, more cost-effectively, and
more dynamically. It is also the pooling of physical storage resources, from one or more
storage devices, which are then presented and managed through an abstraction layer in order
to present a unified view of a “virtual” storage resource or pool on what appears to be a single
device to users and attached hosts.

The abstraction can be made on several levels of the components of storage networks and is
not limited to the disk subsystem. The virtualization layer provides the same kind of services
to the layer above (as the hidden layer below it provides). Storage virtualization software
separates the representation of storage to the operating system (and its users) from the
actual physical components.

1.9.2 Products for storage virtualization

This section lists the IBM storage virtualization products.

Disk virtualization
IBM offers the following products for disk virtualization:
 IBM SAN Volume Controller
The IBM SAN Volume Controller is the world’s leading storage virtualization system, which
is designed to combine storage capacity from multiple disk systems into a reservoir of
capacity that can be better managed as a business resource and not as separate storage
islands. The abstraction of the physical location of the data from the logical representation
of it, which the application on a server sees, allows better utilization, flexibility, efficiency,
and performance.
For a brief overview of what SAN Volume Controller is and what business benefits it can
deliver, see Chapter 20, “IBM SAN Volume Controller” on page 491.
 IBM Storwize V3700, IBM Storwize V5000, IBM Storwize V7000 and IBM Storwize V7000
Unified
For more information, see Chapter 6, “Entry-level disk storage” on page 107 and
Chapter 7, “Midrange disk systems” on page 119.

Chapter 1. Introduction to IBM storage 21

5250_Ch01_Intro.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

 IBM DS8000 family and XIV Gen3 Storage System

For more information, see Chapter 8, “Enterprise disk systems” on page 161.
 IBM Scale-out Network Attached Storage (SONAS)
For more information, see Chapter 10, “IBM Scale Out Network Attached Storage
(SONAS)” on page 283.

Tape virtualization
IBM provides the following tape virtualization products:
 IBM ProtecTIER products
 IBM Virtualization Engine TS7700
 DFSMSrmm

For more information, see Chapter 14, “IBM tape virtualization products” on page 355.

Virtualization software and management software for storage

virtualization
IBM provides the following virtualization software and management software for storage
virtualization:
 IBM Spectrum Scale
IBM Spectrum Scale provides world-class storage management with extreme scalability,
flash accelerated performance, and automatic policy-based storage tiering from flash
through disk to tape.
For more information, see Chapter 5, “IBM Spectrum Scale” on page 93.
 IBM Virtual Storage Center
The SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center helps IT storage managers migrate to an agile
cloud-based storage environment and manage it effectively without having to replace
existing storage systems. For more information, see Chapter 2, “IBM SmartCloud Virtual
Storage Center” on page 25.
 IBM storage cloud solutions
IBM uses a range of flexible storage virtualization solutions and appliances that can help
alleviate data storage challenges by enabling quick implementation of highly scalable,
global, clustered network-attached storage systems. For more information, see Chapter 3,
“IBM storage cloud solutions” on page 47.
 IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center
IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center V5.2 products include two license models:
– IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center V5.2
– IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center Select Edition V5.2
Tivoli Storage Productivity Center V5.2 is designed to provide device management
capabilities such as automated system discovery, provisioning, data replication,
configuration, and performance monitoring for storage systems and storage networks.
Tivoli Storage Productivity Center Select Edition V5.2 offers the same features as Tivoli
Storage Productivity Center V5.2 but at entry level for operations with smaller capacities. It
is licensed per storage device, such as disk controllers and their respective expansion
units.

22 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch01_Intro.fm

For more information, see Chapter 22, “IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center” on
page 563.

1.10 High Performance Storage System (HPSS)

HPSS is cluster-based software that provides for stewardship and access of many petabytes
of data. When properly provisioned, HPSS is capable of concurrently accessing hundreds of
disk arrays and tape drives for extremely high aggregate data transfer rates.

For more information, see Appendix A., “High Performance Storage System (HPSS)” on
page 655.

1.11 Withdrawn products

Appendix B., “Withdrawn products” on page 669 presents a list of the most recent withdrawn
products in the IBM Storage family.

Chapter 1. Introduction to IBM storage 23

5250_Ch01_Intro.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

24 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch02_VSC.fm

Chapter 2. IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage

Center
SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center Entry V5.2 and SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center for
Storwize Family V5.2 can help simplify storage management operations and achieve
enhanced storage efficiency with more control over storage performance and management.

The following capabilities are key value enhancers:

 Virtualized physical storage resources for improved asset usage and consolidated
management
 Performance monitoring that offers performance history as will as threshold and fault
alerting designed for improved performance analysis
 Storage optimization that offers guidance for optimal configuration and enhanced usage,
along with data migration recommendations through tiered storage capacity optimization
tools

SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center offers both a storage virtualization platform and
capabilities for storage virtualization management. It delivers the following in one licensed
software product:
 The complete set of advanced functions available in the Tivoli Storage Productivity Center
 The set of functions available with the virtualization, remote mirroring, and FlashCopy
capabilities of the IBM SAN Volume Controller
 All the capabilities of the Tivoli Storage FlashCopy Manager

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999, 2015. All rights reserved. 25

5250_Ch02_VSC.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

2.1 Overview
IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center V5.2 enables easy migration to agile, cloud-based
storage environments. This solution comprises the advanced functions available in IBM Tivoli
Storage Productivity Center, IBM System Storage SAN Volume Controller, and IBM Tivoli
FlashCopy Manager, in addition to the advanced analytics provided by the IBM SmartCloud
Virtual Storage Center V5.2 license. By integrating these separate products, Virtual Storage
Center provides a combined storage virtualization platform and storage management
solution. It provides more room for data growth and simplifies the administration of storage.

IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center helps IT storage managers migrate to an agile,
cloud-based storage environment and manage it effectively without having to replace existing
storage systems. This powerful offering removes the physicality of storage, in addition to the
complexity associated with managing multivendor infrastructures. It ultimately helps
businesses to optimize provisioning, capacity, availability, data protection, reporting, and
management for virtualized storage.

VSC V5.2 includes the following features and benefits:

 Virtualized storage resources can help simplify management of multiple arrays under a
single, common platform
 Automated management can help reduce time to provision storage resources and place
workloads on the right storage for the data
 Consolidated management; manage storage resources from a web-based user interface
designed to be intuitive and designed to provide instant access to the tools you need
 Advanced capacity utilization features; integrated thin provisioning and transparent
volume transformation that can help change legacy “thick” volumes to more efficient “thin”
volumes
 Disaster recovery and protection; replication over IP networks that is designed to be more
easily configurable in existing IP infrastructures, which can serve as a lower-cost
alternative to other routers and dark fibre

2.1.1 What is new in VSC V5.2

In addition to the new features of Tivoli Storage Productivity Center V5.2 that are listed in
22.3.2, “Version 5.2: New features, functions, and enhancements” on page 575 VSC V5.2 has
the following new features:
 Optimization and balancing
– New names for Storage Optimizer and Tiered Storage Optimizer, but more importantly
the function is now simplified through the web UI
– Automated volume moves
 Tiering definition
Enables more automatic optimization and provisioning
 Self-service provisioning
Create a service catalog for provisioning
 Volume transformation
Scheduling and suspend or resume functions that are not available natively in SAN
Volume Controller.

26 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch02_VSC.fm

2.2 Storage hypervisor

In cloud computing, server hypervisor is a well understood term, with the following key
attributes in providing effective resource usage, cost savings, and flexibility to the business:
 Pooled physical resources are used by virtual machines, which provide high asset usage.
 Virtual machines are mobile, which give administrators their choice of physical server and
location.
 A common set of value capabilities and centralized management are provided for virtual
machines, regardless of what physical server they are running on.

Storage hypervisor is a rapidly emerging way of describing the same value points in a storage
context:
 Consolidation and cost. Storage pooling increases use and decreases costs.
 Business Availability. Data mobility of virtual volumes to improve availability.
 Application Support. Tiered Storage optimization aligns storage costs with required
application service levels.

The IBM Storage Hypervisor offers the following features as illustrated in Figure 2-1 on
page 28:
 Virtualizes storage resources from multiple arrays, vendors, and data centers. Resources
are pooled together and accessed anywhere.
 Standardized storage services are selected from a service catalog
 Mobility of storage volumes. Volumes are moved dynamically, based on workload
balancing policies
 Self-service provisioning that uses automation to allocate capacity
 Pay-per-use storage resources. Users are aware of the impact of their consumption and
service level choices.

The IBM Storage Hypervisor is IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center 5.2 (VSC), which
includes storage virtualization, storage virtualization management, and Storage snapshot
management, which are tightly integrated with advanced analytics to deliver a robust storage
cloud solution. This solution ultimately helps businesses to optimize provisioning, capacity,
availability, data protection, reporting, and management for virtualized storage. See
Figure 2-1 on page 28.

Chapter 2. IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center 27

5250_Ch02_VSC.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Figure 2-1 The Storage Hypervisor

The next section provides a brief description of VSC and its component model.

2.3 IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center components

SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center offers both a storage virtualization platform and
capabilities for storage virtualization management (see Figure 2-2 on page 29). The following
sections, describe what SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center delivers to you, under one
licensed software product. It provides the following benefits:
 A complete set of advanced functions available in IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center
 All the set of functions available with the virtualization, remote-mirroring, and FlashCopy
capabilities of IBM System Storage SAN Volume Controller
 All the application snapshot management capabilities of IBM Tivoli Storage FlashCopy
Manager

28 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch02_VSC.fm

Storage Cloud

Software Defined Storage

IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center

Tivoli Storage Productivity Center

Tivoli Storage FlashCopy Manager

Manage
Protect

Virtualize
SAN32B-E4

GE 0 1

0 16 1 17 2 18 3 19 4 20 5 21 6 22 7 23 8 24 9 25 10 26 11 27 12 28 13 29 14 30 15 31

SAN32B-E4

GE 0 1

0 16 1 17 2 18 3 19 4 20 5 21 6 22 7 23 8 24 9 25 10 26 11 27 12 28 13 29 14 30 15 31

SAN Volume Controller, Storwize V7000

IBM EMC NetAPP HDS Fujitsu SUN HP

Figure 2-2 Overview diagram of IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center

2.3.1 Storage management

IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center, the management component in SmartCloud Virtual
Storage Center, is designed to provide advanced storage infrastructure and data
management capabilities. The Tivoli Storage Productivity Center component available in
SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center includes all the capabilities of Tivoli Storage Productivity
Center.

It uniquely provides all the advanced functions that were available in the past as part of Tivoli
Storage Productivity Center Standard Edition. Unique to SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center
then is the storage analytics engine that provides data management with file system and
database scanning and analysis, data placement, user quotas, and a Tivoli Storage Manager
interface.

IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center helps storage resource management and SAN fabric
management software with the advanced functions such as storage planners, change
management tracking, best-practices gauge, file system scanning, disk optimizer, and IBM
Tiered Storage Optimizer.

IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center provides the following capabilities all from a single
management console
 Heterogeneous storage
 Health monitoring
 Capacity management
 Performance troubleshooting

Chapter 2. IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center 29

5250_Ch02_VSC.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

 Storage system performance management

 SAN fabric performance management
 Trend analysis
 vCenter plug-in
 FlashCopy support
 Disaster recovery and business continuity
 IBM HyperSwap® management

For more information about IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center, see Chapter 22, “IBM
Tivoli Storage Productivity Center” on page 563.

Tivoli Storage Productivity Center can generate threshold alerts and forward them to SNMP
Receivers. Tivoli Storage Productivity Center provides many ready-to-use reports as shown
in Figure 2-3.

Figure 2-3 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center ready-to-use reports

These reports can be scheduled to run periodically. More custom reports can be created with
IBM Cognos.

For more information about IBM Cognos reports and capabilities of Tivoli Storage Productivity
Center for Replication, see the IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center V5.2 Release Guide,
SG24-8204 IBM Redbooks publication.

30 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch02_VSC.fm

2.3.2 Storage virtualization

IBM Storage SAN Volume Controller, the virtualization platform component in SmartCloud
Virtual Storage Center, is a SAN block aggregation virtualization appliance that is designed
for attachment to various host computer systems in environments. It is designed for use in the
large enterprises in addition to small and midsize organizations. Figure 2-4 shows a
conceptual diagram of a storage system that uses the SAN Volume Controller. It shows a
number of hosts that are connected to a SAN fabric or LAN. In practical implementations that
have high-availability requirements (most of the target clients for SAN Volume Controller), the
SAN fabric “cloud” represents a redundant SAN. A redundant SAN consists of a fault-tolerant
arrangement of two or more counterpart SANs, therefore providing alternative paths for each
SAN-attached device.

Figure 2-4 SAN Volume Controller conceptual and topology overview

The IBM System Storage SAN Volume Controller component of VSC improves the use of
your storage resources, simplifies your storage management, and improves the availability of
your applications.

SAN Volume Controller can reduce the number of separate environments that need to be
managed down to a single environment. It provides a single interface for storage
management. After the initial configuration of the storage subsystems, all of the day-to-day
storage management operations are done from the SAN Volume Controller.

Because the SAN Volume Controller provides advanced functions, such as mirroring and
FlashCopy, there is no need to purchase them again for each new disk subsystem.

The SAN Volume Controller has the following key characteristics:

Chapter 2. IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center 31

5250_Ch02_VSC.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

 It is highly scalable, providing an easy growth path to two-n nodes (pairs of nodes).
 It is SAN interface-independent. It supports FC and FCoE and iSCSI, but it is also open for
future enhancements.
 It is host-independent, for fixed block-based Open Systems environments.
 It is external storage RAID controller-independent, providing a continuous and ongoing
process to qualify more types of controllers.
 It can use disks that are internally located within the nodes or in specific expansion units
that are attached to nodes (flash drives).
 It can use disks that are locally attached to the nodes (SAS and flash drives).

On the SAN storage that is provided by the disk subsystems, the SAN Volume Controller can
offer the following services:
 It can create and manage a single pool of storage that is attached to the SAN.
 It can manage multiple tiers of storage.
 It provides block-level virtualization (logical-unit virtualization).
 It provides automatic block-level or sub-LUN-level data migration between storage tiers.
 It provides advanced functions to the entire SAN:
– Large scalable cache
– Advanced Copy Services:
• FlashCopy (point-in-time copy)
• Metro Mirror and Global Mirror (remote copy, synchronous, and asynchronous)
These mirror functions can be either FC or IP based.
 It provides nondisruptive and concurrent data migration.

For more information about IBM SAN Volume Controller, see Chapter 20, “IBM SAN Volume
Controller” on page 491.

For more information about the IBM Storwize family, see the Implementing the IBM Storwize
V7000 Gen2, SG24-8244 IBM Redbooks publication.

2.3.3 Application-aware data protection

IBM Tivoli Storage FlashCopy Manager component of VSC V5.2 delivers high levels of
protection for key applications and databases by using integrated, application-aware
snapshot backup and restore capabilities. Tivoli Storage FlashCopy Manager is designed to
easily integrate with numerous software and storage system snapshot technologies to help
create a high-performance, low-impact solution for advanced data protection.

Tivoli Storage FlashCopy Manager uses storage snapshot capabilities to provide high-speed,
low-impact, application-aware backup and restore functions. Organizations can simplify
operations with automated, policy-based management of multiple snapshot backup versions,
in addition to wizard-based installation and configuration. As a result, this easy-to-use,
quick-to-deploy storage solution can help meet even the most stringent database
recovery-time requirements.

To help simplify snapshot backup and restore processes, Tivoli Storage FlashCopy Manager
delivers advanced visualization and automation capabilities. The solution can provide the
following benefits:

32 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch02_VSC.fm

 Facilitate more frequent backups, which can reduce the time spent recovering data with
transaction logs, increase the flexibility of backup scheduling and simplify administration.
Application availability is also significantly improved due to the load reduction on
production servers.
 Help restore individual mailbox and mail items on Microsoft Exchange 2010 and Exchange
2013 servers from a snapshot backup, including messages, calendars, contacts, and other
mail objects.
 Support database cloning to help users do tasks that are not directly tied to back up and
recovery, such as quality assurance, education, application development, and data mining.
 Enable item-level restores from virtual machine-level backups, which are required when
Exchange is deployed on VMware virtual machines, by using optional IBM Tivoli Storage
Manager for Virtual Environments. The snapshots that are captured by Tivoli Storage
FlashCopy Manager can be retained as backups on local disk.
 Replicate snapshots offsite to support application-consistent disaster recovery, by using
optional integration with Tivoli Storage Manager, Metro Mirror, or Global Mirror.
 Support clustered application environments, including Microsoft Cluster Servers (MSCS),
Veritas Cluster Server (VCS) on Windows and IBM High-Availability Clustering
Multi-Processing (IBM HACMP™) on IBM AIX.

Tivoli Storage FlashCopy Manager supports storage environments that include any storage
system that provides Microsoft VSS (Volume Shadow Copy Services) and any storage
system that works with the device adapter application programming interfaces (APIs) for
Linux and UNIX, including EMC Symmetrix (VMAX and DMX) storage systems via the Rocket
Device Adapter Pack for IBM Tivoli Storage FlashCopy Manager. Any storage system
volumes that are managed by IBM System Storage SAN Volume Controller or external
storage virtualization in IBM Storwize family storage systems. It also supports NetApp and
IBM System Storage N series storage area network (SAN)-attached file servers that support
AIX, HP-UX, Linux, and Solaris platforms; and VMware environments for both Network File
System (NFS)- and SAN-attached file servers, IBM Storwize family storage systems, IBM
System Storage DS8000 series systems, and IBM XIV Storage Systems.

2.4 IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center Features

IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center helps reduce storage administration complexity and
costs by:
 Improving storage usage.
 Making better use of existing storage and controlling storage growth expenditures.
 Improving application availability and simplified data migrations.
 Letting you change storage and move data without taking down applications.
 Simplifying storage management.
 Improving efficiency and productivity for storage management staff.
 Providing advantages with Software Defined Storage architecture model.
 Enabling greater choice (lower cost) when you are buying storage and lowers software
costs.
 Improving application RTO and RPO
 Providing application-aware, hardware-based snapshots
 Providing network-based replication.

Chapter 2. IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center 33

5250_Ch02_VSC.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

The outstanding features of IBM SAN Volume Controller are discussed in detail in the
following sub sections.

2.4.1 Efficient by design

Organizations need to spend less of their IT budgets on storage and storage administration
that they can spend more on new, revenue-generating initiatives. IBM SmartCloud Virtual
Storage Center has built-in efficiency features that help users avoid the need to purchase
add-ons or more licenses or deal with complicated integration issues. It includes the following
advanced efficiency
 Storage virtualization Virtualization. This technology is foundational for clouds and
software-defined environments. Without virtualization, storage capacity utilization
averages about 50 percent, but virtualized storage enables up to 90-percent utilization by
enabling online data migration for load balancing. IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center
allows you to virtualize your storage resources from multiple storage systems and
vendors. Pooling storage devices enables you to access capacity from any storage
system, a significant advantage over the limitations inherent in traditional storage.
 Simplified user experience. IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center provides an advanced
GUI and a VMware vCenter plug-in to reduce administration complexity. Administrators
can do common tasks consistently, over multiple storage systems, even systems from
different vendors. The IBM storage GUI enables simplified storage provisioning with
intelligent presets and embedded best practices, and integrates context-sensitive
performance management throughout.
 Near-instant, application-aware backup and restore. To reduce downtime in
high-availability virtual environments, critical applications such as email and databases
require near-instant backups that have little or no impact on application performance.
Application-aware snapshot backups can be done frequently throughout the day to reduce
the risk of data loss. IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center simplifies administration and
recovery from snapshot backups.

2.4.2 Self-optimizing
Self-optimizing storage adapts automatically to workload changes to optimize application
performance, eliminating most manual tuning efforts. The self-optimizing features of IBM
SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center include:
 IBM Tiered Storage Optimizer. IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center uses performance
metrics, advanced analytics, and automation to enable storage optimization on a large
scale. It can optimize storage volumes across different storage system and virtual
machine vendors and brands. The Tiered Storage Optimizer feature can reduce the unit
cost of storage by as much as 50 percent, based on deployment in a large IBM data
center.
 IBM Easy Tier®. IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center helps optimize flash storage with
automated tiering for critical workloads. Easy Tier helps make the best use of available
storage resources by automatically moving the most active data to the fastest storage tier,
which helps applications and virtual desktop environments run up to three times faster.
 Thin provisioning and efficient remote mirroring. Thin provisioning helps automate
provisioning and improve productivity by enabling administrators to focus on overall
storage deployment and utilization, in addition to longer-term strategic requirements,
without being distracted by routine storage-provisioning requests. IBM Metro Mirror and
Global Mirror functions automatically copy data to remote sites as it changes, enabling fast

34 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch02_VSC.fm

failover and recovery. These capabilities are integrated into the advanced GUI, making
them easy to deploy

2.4.3 Cloud agile

Cloud computing is all about agility. Storage for clouds needs to be as flexible and
service-oriented as the applications it supports. IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center can
turn existing storage into a private storage cloud with no “rip and replace” required. The
solution enables you to adapt to the dynamic storage needs of cloud applications by providing
storage virtualization, automation, and integration for cloud environments with features that
include the following things:
 OpenStack cloud application provisioning. IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center
includes an OpenStack Cinder volume driver that enables automated provisioning by
using any of the storage systems that are controlled by IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage
Center. OpenStack cloud applications can access multiple storage tiers and services,
without added complexity.
 Self-service portal. IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center can provide provisioning
automation for self-service storage portals, such as IBM SmartCloud Storage Access,
which enable immediate responses to service requests and eliminate manual
administration tasks.
 Pay-per-use invoicing. IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center integrates with IBM
SmartCloud Cost Manager and other chargeback systems to enable flexible usage
accounting for storage resources. IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center can become
the single source for usage metrics across storage area networks (SANs),
network-attached storage, and direct-attached storage.

2.5 IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center Interfaces

IBM provides support for multiple software defined environments, as shown in Figure 2-5 on
page 36.

Chapter 2. IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center 35

5250_Ch02_VSC.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Figure 2-5 Interfaces to IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center

Consider the following things when you run IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center:
 OpenStack open source code can manage compute, network, and storage resources.
 IBM SmartCloud is based on OpenStack with additional IBM proprietary features.
 IBM Cloud Orchestrator provides storage provisioning, orchestration, and automation
 VMware runs primarily on x86-based servers

The interface features are summarized in Table 2-1.

Table 2-1 Comparison of virtual storage interfaces to software defined environment

OpenStack IBM Cloud and SmartCloud VMware

IBM is platinum sponsor of IBM Cloud Manager with VMware is entirely

OpenStack Foundation. OpenStack is based on proprietary, but has large
OpenStack open source market share for x86-based
code, with additional server infrastructure.
proprietary features from
IBM.

36 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch02_VSC.fm

OpenStack IBM Cloud and SmartCloud VMware

OpenStack open source IBM Cloud Manager with IBM was VMware's first
code can manage IBM OpenStack and IBM Cloud OEM and joint development
compute, network, and Orchestrator support variety partner (since 1998). IBM
storage resources. of server hypervisors and continues strong
interfaces. partnership. IBM Global
Services is one of VMware's
largest customers, using
VMware in many of their
client solutions.

IBM offers Cinder interfaces SmartCloud Storage VMware vStorage API for
on most of its major storage Access and IBM Cloud data protection (VADP),
products for Block storage Orchestrator provide VMware Site Recovery
access and supports Swift self-provisioning and Manager (SRM), VMware
interfaces for object storage orchestration capabilities. vSphere storage APIs
access. -Array integration (VAAI),
VMware vCenter.

The VSC interfaces are overviewed in the following sections.

2.5.1 OpenStack Cinder support

OpenStack software controls large pools of compute, storage, and networking resources
throughout a data center and is managed through a dashboard or with the OpenStack API.
OpenStack works with popular enterprise and open source technologies, which makes it ideal
for heterogeneous infrastructure.

The software is built by a thriving community of developers, in collaboration with users, and is
designed in the open at the Summits. For more detail about OpenStack, see the following link:

http://www.openstack.org/

Figure 2-6 shows the interaction between the OpenStack components (Horizon, Nova, and
Cinder) and Tivoli Storage Productivity Center. When an OpenStack cloud user requests a
new volume for a virtual machine via the Horizon dashboard, the Cinder node sends Tivoli
Storage Productivity Center all the necessary information via the Cinder driver, which
includes service class information. With that information, Tivoli Storage Productivity Center
chooses the most appropriate storage system to use and creates a volume and all the
necessary connections. Tivoli Storage Productivity Center then passes that information back
to the Cinder node via the same driver. From there, the Cinder node assigns the volume to
the virtual machine.

Chapter 2. IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center 37

5250_Ch02_VSC.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Figure 2-6 Tivoli Storage Productivity Center Cinder driver components

2.5.2 IBM SmartCloud Storage Access

IBM offers IBM SmartCloud Storage Access, an easy-to-deploy, simple-to-use software
solution that features a self-service portal for storage provisioning, monitoring and reporting.
It is designed to provide users with a self-service file-serving facility over the Internet. With a
few clicks, users can create an account, provision storage and start uploading files.

IBM SmartCloud Storage Access Version 1.2 or later supports the following storage devices:
 IBM Scale Out Network Attached Storage (SONAS)
 IBM Storwize V7000 Unified
 IBM Storwize V7000
 IBM Storwize V5000
 IBM FlashSystem V840
 IBM System Storage SAN Volume Controller
 IBM XIV Storage System

Figure 2-7 describes a deployment architecture for a private storage cloud with IBM
SmartCloud Storage Access. IBM SmartCloud Storage Access works with various external
systems or services to provide the function that is required for a private storage cloud.

38 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch02_VSC.fm

Figure 2-7 IBM SmartCloud Storage Access Deployment Architecture diagram

The deployment architecture as shown Figure 2-7, has IBM SmartCloud Storage Access
working with Tivoli Storage Productivity Center, which is the storage manager to provision
and de-provision network drives. Tivoli Storage Productivity Center plays a major role in
understanding the resource request from IBM SmartCloud Storage Access and completing
the resource provisioning.

For more information, see the IBM SmartCloud Storage Access V1.2 Implementation Guide,
SG24-8120 IBM Redbooks publication.

2.5.3 IBM Cloud Orchestrator

IBM Cloud Orchestrator provides cloud management for your IT services, allowing you to
accelerate the delivery of software and infrastructure. Based on open standards, it reduces
the number of steps to manage public, private, and hybrid clouds by using an easy-to-use
interface.

IBM Cloud Orchestrator gives you access to ready-to-use patterns and content packs –
helping to speed configuration, provisioning, and deployment. It integrates management tools
such as metering, usage, accounting, monitoring, and capacity management into your cloud
services. Go live as quickly as you can develop and test applications.

IBM Cloud Orchestrator helps you:

 Quickly deploy and scale on-premise and off-premise cloud services.
 Provision and scale cloud resources.

Chapter 2. IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center 39

5250_Ch02_VSC.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

 Reduce administrator workloads and error-prone manual IT administrator tasks.

 Integrate with existing environments by using application programming interfaces and tool
extensions.
 Deliver services with IBM SoftLayer®, existing OpenStack platforms, IBM PowerVM®, IBM
z System, VMware, or Amazon EC2

IBM Cloud Orchestrator does resource orchestration, workload orchestration, and service
orchestration (see Figure 2-8 on page 40). A cloud orchestrator administrator can create a
process, which prepares a VM, provisions and manages the processor, storage and network,
and place the new system based on existing workloads. Further, the process can optimize the
performance and operation of the server. Finally, the entire lifecycle of the business
application is managed, ensuring that patches are applied in a timely manner and that service
tickets are opened when they are required.

Figure 2-8 IBM Cloud Orchestrator

For information about IBM Cloud Orchestrator, see the following link:

http://www.ibm.com/software/products/en/ibm-cloud-orchestrator

2.5.4 VMware
VMware provides servers virtualization on Intel based architecture. The core components of
VMware solution are VMware ESX and ESXi based hypervisor, VMware vSphere vCenter for
providing management capabilities and vSphere vMotion to combat planned downtime and
VMware vCenter Site Recovery Manager to automate end-to-end recovery processes for
virtual applications. This section provides a brief description.

Figure 2-9 on page 41 shows the vSphere suite in a more comprehensive way. vSphere is a
product suite that is similar to Microsoft Office suite, which contains Microsoft word, Microsoft
Excel, Microsoft Access, Microsoft Powerpoint, and so on. VMware vSphere suite includes an
ESXi hypervisor, vCenter, and vSphere client. ESXi is a hypervisor that is installed on a
physical machine. vSphere Client is installed on VMware administrator's notebook or desktop
PC and is used to access ESXi Server to install and manage virtual machines on ESXi
server. vCenter server is installed as virtual machine on top of ESXi server. vCenter server is

40 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch02_VSC.fm

a vSphere component, which is mostly used in large environment where there are many ESXi
servers and a number of virtual machines. The vCenter server can also be accessed by
vSphere client for management purpose. So, vSphere client is used to access ESXi server
directly in small environment while in larger environment, vSphere client is used again to
access vCenter server, which ultimately manages the ESXi server.

Figure 2-9 VMware vSphere Suite overview

VSC and VMware are integrated by using Tivoli Storage Productivity Center plug-ins, as
shown in Figure 2-10.

Figure 2-10 VSC and VMware Integration Topology

Chapter 2. IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center 41

5250_Ch02_VSC.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

For more information about VMware, visit:

http://www.vmware.com

2.6 IBM Virtual Storage Center offerings

The SmartCloud VSC V5.2 license for the System Storage SAN Volume Controller is a
software entitlement to run both the external virtualization, FlashCopy and remote copy
services features. The only feature of the SAN Volume Controller not included in the
SmartCloud VSC V5.2 license entitlement is the Real Time Compression option, which can
be added as a separate priced license. This software license does not include the hardware
nodes that are required for a complete SAN Volume Controller implementation.

SmartCloud VSC V5.2 provides external virtualization, FlashCopy, and remote copy services
software entitlement for the System Storage SAN Volume Controller as the virtualization
platform. Also, for a smaller size of deployment, Storwize V7000 can be used as the
virtualization engine in a SmartCloud VSC V5.2 configuration.

The software license entitlement for the System Storage SAN Volume Controller and the
Tivoli Storage FlashCopy Manager is based on the current production versions of these
products. The versions of code available via SmartCloud VSC 5.2 for download for the
System Storage SAN Volume Controller and the Tivoli Storage FlashCopy Manager are the
same as the versions available for download if these products were downloaded independent
of SmartCloud VSC 5.2.

2.6.1 License model overview

IBM Virtual Storage Center helps customers easily migrate their storage to a virtual
environment and manage storage efficiently. IBM VSC licensing charges are based on
managed capacity. This model contrasts with SAN Volume Controller, where FlashCopy and
metro/global mirror are licensed on virtual capacity. The managed capacity model avoids
over-provisioning, which can become expensive with SAN Volume Controller. Table 2-2 on
page 42 compares the current IBM VSC and IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center licensing
options and features. The next provide more detail about each of the IBM Virtual Storage
Center licenses.

Table 2-2 Current 5.x VSC and Tivoli Storage Productivity Center licensing by offerings

Product Name Licensing Usage License Name FCM SAN Storwize

License Volume License
Controller
License

VSC Per Terabyte Tivoli Storage   

(greater than 250 Terabytes Productivity Center
or greater than 2 I/O groups) Advanced

VSC Entry Per Terabyte Tivoli Storage  

(less than 250 Terabytes Productivity Center
and less than 2 I/O groups) Advanced

VSC for Storwize Per Enclosure Tivoli Storage  

Family Productivity Center
Advanced

42 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch02_VSC.fm

Product Name Licensing Usage License Name FCM SAN Storwize

License Volume License
Controller
License

Tivoli Storage Per Terabyte Tivoli Storage

Productivity Center Productivity Center

Tivoli Storage Per Enclosure Tivoli Storage

Productivity Center Productivity Center
Select Select

If you are migrating from an older IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center license to a current
IBM Virtual Storage Center or IBM Tivoli Storage Productivity Center license, see Table 2-3
for a comparison of functional features of the various licenses.

Table 2-3 Comparison of licenses by features

Tivoli Storage Productivity Center 4.2.x Tivoli Storage Productivity Center
5.x

Features Basic Disk Data Replication Standard Tivoli VSC VSC for
Storage and Storwize
Productivity VSC Family
Center for Entry
Replication
and
Tivoli
Storage
Productivity
Center for
Replication
Select

Discovery, topology,       
monitoring, capacity
management, alerting,
basic capacity
reporting

Disk performance      
reporting

2-site replication    
management

3-site replication    
management

Advanced NAS    
functions

File System and DB    

scans, reports,
quotas, script
integration

Fabric performance    
reporting

Storage Optimizer   

Chapter 2. IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center 43

5250_Ch02_VSC.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Tivoli Storage Productivity Center 4.2.x Tivoli Storage Productivity Center

5.x

Features Basic Disk Data Replication Standard Tivoli VSC VSC for
Storage and Storwize
Productivity VSC Family
Center for Entry
Replication
and
Tivoli
Storage
Productivity
Center for
Replication
Select

SAN Storage Planner   

with policy-based
provisioning

VMWare Hypervisor    
reports

Storage tier reports   

Web GUI and Cognos   

Cloud API (Tivoli  

Storage Productivity
Center for Replication
internal)

SAN Volume 
Controller: Base,
FlashCopy and
Remote Copy (Metro
Mirror & Global Mirror)
license

FlashCopy Manager  

Storwize License 

2.6.2 VSC license: Enterprise deployment

Do you have a medium to large storage configuration (> 250 TB) possibly with various storage
systems to manage, and high performance on that virtualized storage is mandated?

License: Standard VSC

 ‘Per TB’ price metric with tiered capacity pricing
 No restrictions on TB and SAN Volume Controller I/O groups
 SAN Volume Controller is the storage engine of choice
 Includes all features of standard VSC license (virtualization, FlashCopy, Mirroring,
Advanced Analytics)

Choose the VSC Entry license when you are using a SAN Volume Controller as your storage
engine, your managed capacity is greater than 250 TB, you are using more than two SAN
Volume Controller I/O groups, or both.

44 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch02_VSC.fm

2.6.3 VSC Entry license

If you are managing a smaller storage configuration (< 250 TB), possibly with various storage
systems to manage, and high performance on that virtualized storage is mandated, consider
the VSC Entry license. It provides the following features:
 ‘Per TB’ price metric
 Restricted to 250 TB and 2 SAN Volume Controller I/O groups1
 SAN Volume Controller is the storage engine of choice
 Includes all features of standard VSC license (virtualization, FlashCopy, Mirroring,
Advanced Analytics)

Choose the VSC Entry license when you are using a SAN Volume Controller as your storage
engine, your managed capacity is less than 250 TB, and you are using 2 or less SAN Volume
Controller I/O groups.

2.6.4 VSC for Storwize Family license

If you are managing a small to medium storage configuration (100 TB - 1 PB) where the
storage virtualization investment is largely for Storwize V7000, Storwize V5000, or both to
manage storage systems, consider the VSC for Storwize family license. It provides the
following benefits:
 Restricted to deployment on Storwize V7000 and V5000 hardware
 ‘Per Enclosure’ price metric
 No restrictions on the number of enclosures
 Includes all features of VSC (external virtualization, Mirroring, Advanced Analytics);
 License does not include base software license for Storwize HW

Choose the VSC for Storwize Family license if you are using a Storwize V7000, Storwize
V5000, or both as your storage engine.

2.7 More information

For other storage-related IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center information, see these
references:
 For more information about Tivoli Storage Productivity Center V5.2.4, see the Tivoli
Storage Productivity Center 5.2.4 Knowledge Center.
http://www.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/SSNE44_5.2.4/com.ibm.tpc_V524.doc/fq
z0_r_whats_new_release_5.2.4.html
 For more information about Tivoli Storage FlashCopy Manager V4.1, see Software
Announcement 213-447, dated October 29, 2013:
http://www.ibm.com/common/ssi/ShowDoc.wss?docURL=/common/ssi/rep_ca/7/897/ENUS2
13-447/index.html&lang=en&request_locale=en
 For more information about IBM Storwize Family V7.4, see Software Announcement
214-450, dated October 28, 2014:

1 Use IBM Real-time Compression to extend capacity management beyond 250 TB.

Chapter 2. IBM SmartCloud Virtual Storage Center 45

5250_Ch02_VSC.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

http://www.ibm.com/common/ssi/ShowDoc.wss?docURL=/common/ssi/rep_ca/0/897/ENUS2
14-450/index.html&lang=en&request_locale=en

46 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch03_StorageCloud.fm

Chapter 3. IBM storage cloud solutions

IBM uses a range of flexible storage virtualization solutions and appliances that can help
alleviate data storage challenges by enabling quick implementation of highly scalable, global,
clustered network-attached storage systems.

IBM explores how these challenges can be addressed in the various cloud models that are
aligned to cloud computing constructs (that is, public, private, and hybrid clouds).

This chapter describes the following topics:

 Overview
 Storage cloud
 Storage cloud delivery models
 IBM storage hardware cloud offerings
 IBM storage software cloud offerings
 IBM Cloud Orchestrator
 IBM cloud disaster recovery solutions

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999, 2015. All rights reserved. 47

5250_Ch03_StorageCloud.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

3.1 Overview
A storage cloud provides storage as a service to storage consumers. It can be delivered in
any of the listed cloud delivery models (public, private, hybrid, community). A storage cloud
can be used to support a diverse range of storage needs, including mass data stores, file
shares, backup, archive, and more. Implementations range from public user data stores to
large private storage area networks (SAN) or network-attached storage (NAS), hosted
in-house or at third-party managed facilities. The following examples are publicly available
storage clouds:
 IBM cloud computing offers various storage options, including archive, backup, and object
storage.
 Skydrive from Microsoft allows the public to store and share nominated files on the
Microsoft public storage cloud service.
 Email services, such as Hotmail, Gmail, and Yahoo, store user email and attachments in
their respective storage clouds.
 Facebook and YouTube allow users to store and share photos and videos.
 iCloud from Apple is designed to work seamlessly with all Apple devices connected to the
internet.
 Google Drive from Google allows users to store and access files anywhere, in the web, on
hard disk drive or on the go.

Storage cloud computing capability can also be offered in the form of storage as a service,
where you pay based on the amount of storage space used. There are various ways a
storage cloud can be used, based on your organization's specific requirements.

3.1.1 Cloud computing

Before describing storage clouds, it is useful to describe the larger IT landscape by
developing a general understanding of cloud computing concepts.

Many traditional IT services provision the characteristics of a cloud service. For a service to
be considered a “cloud service”, it needs to exhibit the following characteristics:
 Support self-service provisioning.
 Be accessible through the Internet or corporate intranet.
 Provide resources from a resource pool, without the user needing knowledge of the pool.
 Provide simple and fast resource elasticity, as users demand changes.
 Provide ability to monitor resources with a dashboard view on cloud health status.
 Support a metering capability, which enables a dynamic chargeback model.

To provide these characteristics, there are two infrastructure enablers:

 Virtualization
 Automation

You are likely to be using a cloud service when the service you are using exhibits the
characteristics that are listed previously. From a cloud user perspective, it is important that
you are able to do self-service activities that relate to the cloud service you are using, to
quickly provision new service instances, and have resources that are elastically sized to meet
your changing processing demands.

Figure 3-1 on page 49 illustrates how the service models described previously can be
layered. As you travel up the service model layers, the service provider is responsible for
providing more effort, as the level of function increases. By contrast, as you travel down the

48 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch03_StorageCloud.fm

service layers, the service user must provide more effort in terms of environment
customization.

Business Process as a Service

Service Provider Effort

Service User Effort

Software as a Service

Platform as a Service

Infrastructure as a Service

Figure 3-1 Cloud service models

Table 3-1 lists the functions that are provided by the cloud service provider and the cloud
service user for each service model. For any service model, the service provider also
provides the functions that are listed in the service models below it, whereas the cloud user
provides the functions that are listed in the service models above it, if required, as indicated
by the arrows that are shown in the table.

Table 3-1 Cloud service provider and service user responsibilities by service model
Service model Cloud service provider Cloud user
delivered functions delivered functions

Business process as a service Business Process Business Process

↓ configuration

Software as a service Applications Application

↓ configuration ↑

Platform as a service Languages Applications ↑

Libraries
Tools
Middleware
Application Servers
Database Servers
↓

Infrastructure as a service Processing Languages

Storage Libraries
Network Tools
Middleware
Application servers
Database servers ↑

For more information, see the following website:

http://www.ibm.com/cloud-computing/

Chapter 3. IBM storage cloud solutions 49

5250_Ch03_StorageCloud.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

3.2 Storage cloud

A storage cloud provides storage as a service to storage consumers. It can be delivered in
any of the cloud delivery models (public, private, hybrid, or community). A storage cloud can
be used to support a diverse range of storage needs, including mass data stores, file shares,
backup, archive, and more.

Cloud data storage is a critical component in the cloud computing model. Without cloud
storage, there can be no cloud service. The growing interest in cloud storage coincident with
cloud computing is explained in terms of the challenges that traditional IT presents.

Figure 3-2 describes how various electronic or portable devices can access storage through
the Internet without necessarily knowing the explicit details of the type or location of storage
that is used underneath. Although the devices can access SAN or NAS storage, the SAN or
AS storage itself can use storage cloud for backup or other purposes.

Laptop Windows PC

PDA File
Application
Servers Database
Cloud Etc...

Cell Phone
Storage

SAN / NAS

SmartPhone
Mac

Network
Scanner Tablet PC

Figure 3-2 Overview of Storage cloud

Storage usage differences within a cloud computing infrastructure

Within a cloud computing infrastructure, a useful distinction can be made between how
storage capacity is used, similar to the difference that exists in traditional IT between system
data (files, libraries, utilities, and so on), and application data and user files. This distinction
becomes important for storage allocation in virtual server implementations.

Storage cloud
Storage cloud is the storage capacity service that is provided for client data and the primary
focus of this paper. A storage cloud exhibits the characteristics that are essential to any cloud
service (self-service provisioning, Internet and intranet accessibility, pooled resources,

50 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch03_StorageCloud.fm

elastic, and metered). It is a cloud environment on which the offered services provide the
ability to store and retrieve data on behalf of computing processes that are not part of the
storage cloud service. A storage cloud can be used in combination with a compute cloud, a
private compute facility, or as storage for a computing device. Storage in a storage cloud can
be categorized as follows:
 Hosted storage
This category is primary storage for block or file data that can be written and read on
demand, and is provisioned as generally higher performance and availability storage.
 Reference storage
This category is fixed content storage to which blocks or files are typically written to once,
and read from many times. Examples of data typically on reference storage include
multimedia, archival data, medical imaging, surveillance data, log files, and others.

Storage for cloud

Storage for cloud is a general name that is applied to the type of storage environment,
implemented in cloud computing that is required to provision cloud computing services. For
example, when a virtual server machine is created, some storage capacity is required. This
storage is provisioned as part of the virtual machine creation process to support the operating
system and runtime environment for the instance. It is not delivered by a storage cloud. The
types of storage that is provisioned for a cloud service can be categorized as follows:
 Ephemeral storage
This storage is required only while a virtual machine is running. It is freed from use and
made available to the storage pool when the virtual machine is shut down. Examples of
this category of storage include boot volumes, page files, and other temporary data.
 Persistent storage
This storage is required across virtual machine reboots. It is retained even when a virtual
machine is shut down. It includes “gold” (master template) images, systems
customization, and user data.
Figure 3-3 illustrates the categories of storage that is found in cloud computing.

Ephemeral Storage Hosted Storage

• Typically boot volumes • File storage
• Goes away when VM is • Backup / Disaster
shut down recovery

Persistent Storage
• Persists across VM Reference Storage
reboots • Archives
• Can be shared between • Video
VM’s surveillance
• Transactional
Storage for cloud Storage as cloud

Figure 3-3 Storage categories that are used in cloud

Chapter 3. IBM storage cloud solutions 51

5250_Ch03_StorageCloud.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

3.2.1 Storage cloud benefits

The overall benefits of storage cloud vary significantly based on the underlying storage
infrastructure. Storage cloud can help businesses achieve more effective functions at a lower
cost while improving business agility and reducing project scheduling risk.

Figure 3-4 on page 52 identifies the differences between the traditional IT model and a
storage cloud model.

Value delivered From traditional To cloud

Storage Provisioning Weeks Minutes

Localized, any time

For users Continuous Access to data Centralized
any where

Storage Capacity Fixed Dynamic (Elastic)

Î

Reduced storage admin costs Up to 50% savings

Reduced energy costs Up to 36%

Increased storage utilization From 50% Up to 90%

For IT

Figure 3-4 Benefits of moving storage cloud from traditional IT infrastructure

The benefits of moving storage cloud from a traditional IT infrastructure:

 Dynamic scaling and provisioning (elasticity)
 Faster deployment of storage resources
 Reduction in TCO and better ROI
 Reduce cost of managing storage
 Greener data centers
 Dynamic, flexible chargeback model (pay-per-use)
 Multiuser file sharing
 Self-service user portal
 Integrated storage and service management
 Improved efficiency of data management
 Faster time to market

3.3 Storage cloud delivery models

Cloud delivery models refer to how a cloud solution is used by an organization, where the
data is located, and who operates the cloud solution. Cloud computing supports multiple
delivery models that can deliver the capabilities that are needed in a cloud solution.

Figure 3-5 on page 53 shows a summary of the standard cloud computing deployment
models.

52 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch03_StorageCloud.fm

Figure 3-5 Summary of standard cloud computing deployment models

Figure 3-6 on page 53 shows the cloud computing models and identifies the characteristics in
terms of roles, users, and accessibility.

Host Provider Enterprise, 3rd Party Enterprise, 3rd Party Community, 3rd Party
Owner Provider Enterprise Enterprise Community
Access Internet Intranet, VPN Intranet, VPN Intranet, VPN

Users Public Individuals Business Units Business Units Community Members

Organisations

Figure 3-6 Storage cloud delivery models

See the following sections for detailed descriptions of the cloud delivery models:
 3.3.1, “Public storage cloud”
 3.3.2, “Private storage cloud” on page 54
 3.3.3, “Hybrid storage cloud” on page 54
 3.3.4, “Community storage cloud” on page 55

Chapter 3. IBM storage cloud solutions 53

5250_Ch03_StorageCloud.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

3.3.1 Public storage cloud

A public cloud is one in which the cloud infrastructure is made available to the general public
or a large industry group over the Internet. The infrastructure is not owned by the user, but by
an organization that provides cloud services. Services can be provided either at no cost, as a
subscription, or under a pay-as-you-go model.

Data is stored on-premises with the cloud storage service provider and is accessed through
network services. All the management tasks that are associated with storage, such as
upgrading and replacing, are carried out by the storage service provider; you pay only for the
amount of storage space that is used. Typically, this storage capacity is somewhat
inexpensive because of economies of scale. But with data stored in the public domain,
security and multitenancy are major areas of concern, which need to be evaluated in
accordance with business requirements. Storage resources can be scaled up or down to
meet the user requirements. Also, in this model, the bulk of capital expenditures (CAPEX) to
acquire storage capacity is shifted to operational expense, as the storage cloud service
provider purchases the resources and therefore incurs the CAPEX.

A Public storage cloud is designed for customers who do not want to own, manage, or
maintain the storage environment, thus reducing their capital and operational expenditures
cost around storage. The public storage cloud provides for variable billing options and shared
tenancy of the storage cloud, giving customers the flexibility to manage the usage and growth
of their storage needs.

3.3.2 Private storage cloud

A private cloud refers to a cloud solution where the infrastructure is provisioned for the
exclusive use of a single organization. The organization often acts as a cloud service provider
to internal business units that obtain all the benefits of a cloud without having to provision
their own infrastructure

The data is stored on-premises with the client or in client-dedicated facilities, and accessed
over the client’s intranet. The management can be done either by the client or can be given
(outsourced) to a service provider. Unlike the public model, data is comparatively secure
behind enterprise firewalls. Because the storage space is not shared by other organizations,
security and multitenancy concerns are the same as in traditional IT. In this model, the client
can also save significantly with storage consolidation and virtualization.

Similar to a purchase or lease model, with a private cloud, customers have the choice of
technology and location on dedicated infrastructure with fixed monthly charges and physical
capacity at the customer level.

The Private storage cloud has fixed charges and dedicated tenancy, so it is designed for
enterprise customers who want flexibility around ownership, management, and maintenance
of the storage cloud.

3.3.3 Hybrid storage cloud

A hybrid cloud, as the name implies, is a combination of various cloud types (public, private,
or community). Each cloud in the hybrid mix remains a unique entity, but is bound to the mix
by technology that enables data and application portability. The hybrid approach allows a
business to take advantage of the scalability and cost-effectiveness of a public cloud without
making applications and data accessible beyond the corporate intranet.

54 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch03_StorageCloud.fm

Hybrid cloud solutions provide interoperability of workloads that be managed across multiple
cloud environments. This interoperability includes access to third-party resources and to a
client partner network. The idea is to seamlessly link on-premises applications whether
home-grown, packaged, or running on a private cloud.

For example, business-critical data (payroll processing, HR, finance) can be stored in a
private cloud (to use the security and control over the data) and relatively less important data
can be maintained in public cloud storage.

Hybrid cloud consists of two or more different cloud infrastructures that remain distinct but
share technologies that enable porting of data and applications from one to the other.

The Hybrid storage cloud as the name implies, data is provisioned in a mixed private and
public environment. For customers with business critical data such as “payroll processing”
can be stored in a private cloud and relatively less important data can be maintained in public
storage.

3.3.4 Community storage cloud

A community cloud shares the cloud infrastructure across several organizations in support of
a specific community that has common concerns (for example, mission, security
requirements, policy, and compliance considerations). The community cloud infrastructure
can be provided on-premises or at a third party’s data center, and can be managed by the
participating organizations or by a third party.

The primary goal of a community cloud is to have participating organizations realize the
benefits of a public cloud, such as shared infrastructure costs and a pay-as-you-go billing
structure, with the added levels of privacy, security, and policy compliance that are usually
associated with a private cloud.

The Community cloud solution is for the exclusive use of a community, which is a group of
people from different customers that share a common interest or mission. These cloud
solutions can be owned, managed, and hosted by one of more members of the community, a
third party.

A community storage cloud limits access to a cloud infrastructure to organizations within a

specific “community” that has common requirements and concerns (for example, mission,
security requirements, policy, and compliance considerations). The participating
organizations receive the benefits of a storage cloud, such as shared infrastructure costs and
a pay-as-you-go billing structure, with added levels of privacy, security, and policy compliance
that is usually associated only with a private cloud. The community cloud infrastructure can
be delivered on premises or at a third party’s data center, and can be managed by the
participating organizations or by a third party.

Chapter 3. IBM storage cloud solutions 55

5250_Ch03_StorageCloud.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

3.4 IBM storage hardware cloud offerings

IBM is a proven leader in partnering with clients worldwide to collaborate in solving business
problems through the implementation of world class, smart information technology solutions.
From hyper-efficient storage arrays and massively scalable virtualization engines to smarter
infrastructure management software to comprehensive implementation and operational
services capabilities, the IBM portfolio of smart storage cloud capabilities is unmatched in the
industry.

If you are building your own storage cloud solution or if you want a complete solution
immediately, the IBM storage cloud portfolio can fulfill that need. Consider the following
offerings:
 IBM XIV Storage System. The IBM XIV Storage System is a high-end fully scalable
general-purpose disk storage system with a design that is an ideal match with cloud
delivery models. It offers an outstanding virtualized grid design, which allows massive
parallelism that always allocates system resources evenly. It scales performance with
capacity, therefore transparently providing elasticity, which is essential for cloud
implementations.
For more information about IBM XIV Storage System, see 8.1.2, “XIV series overview” on
page 163.
 IBM Storwize V7000 and V7000 Unified Storage System. IBM Storwize V7000 Unified is a
virtualized storage system that is designed to consolidate block and file workloads into a
single storage system for simplicity of management, reduced cost, highly scalable
capacity, performance, and high availability.
IBM Storwize V7000 Unified storage also offers improved efficiency and flexibility through
built-in solid-state drive (SSD) optimization, thin provisioning, and nondisruptive migration
of data from existing storage. The system can virtualize and reuse existing disk systems to
provide greater potential return on investment. Integrated IBM Active Cloud Engine®
enables you to use all those features to build your storage cloud.
For more information about IBM Storwize V7000 Unified, see 7.3, “IBM Storwize V7000”
on page 142.
 IBM SAN Volume Controller:
SAN Volume Controller is a storage virtualization system that enables a single point of
control for storage resources to help support improved business application availability
and greater resource utilization. The objective is to manage storage resources in your IT
infrastructure. You can ensure that they are used to the advantage of your business, and
used quickly, efficiently, and in real time, while preventing increases in administrative
costs.
For more information about IBM SAN Volume Controller, see Chapter 20, “IBM SAN
Volume Controller” on page 491.
 IBM Flash System storage. IBM Flash System delivers extreme performance to derive
measurable economic value across the data architecture: servers, software, applications,
and storage.
For information about IBM Flash System storage, see Chapter 9, “IBM FlashSystem
storage” on page 273.
 IBM Storage DS8870. The IBM DS8870 is the IBM flagship enterprise class Tier 1 block
storage device. In the most recent release of DS8870, release 7.2, IBM enhanced the
OpenStack Cinder driver with DS8870 support.
For more information about IBM System Storage DS8870, see 8.2.1, “The DS8870 with
IBM POWER7 processor technology” on page 165.

56 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch03_StorageCloud.fm

Tip: For more information about using the IBM DS8870 in an OpenStack environment,
see Using the IBM DS8870 in an OpenStack Cloud Environment, TIPS1150 at the
following website:
http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/abstracts/tips1150.html

 IBM PureSystems. By combining the flexibility of a general-purpose system, the elasticity

of cloud, and the simplicity of an appliance, PureSystems can transform the IT lifecycle.
For more information about IBM PureSystems, see Chapter 4, “IBM PureSystems
overview” on page 71.
 IBM storage software. IBM's comprehensive storage software solutions help to centralize,
streamline, and automate your physical and virtual infrastructure. These benefits help you
to optimize workloads and increase your ability to deliver IT services that align with
business goals.
For more information, see Part 5, “IBM storage software” on page 469.
 IBM Storage Cloud service offerings. Using the products in this list, IBM provides service
offerings that help you gain the benefits of a storage cloud without creating your own
infrastructure. IBM provides these offerings as part of the IBM SmartCloud family, which
supports both the public cloud and the private cloud delivery models.
For more information about IBM Storage Cloud service offerings, see 3.5, “IBM storage
software cloud offerings”.

3.5 IBM storage software cloud offerings

IBM storage cloud is a family of integrated enterprise-class cloud computing technologies and
services for securely building and using private and public clouds. Built upon open standards
and combined with deep IBM expertise and preferred practices, storage cloud is designed for
complex high-performance computing environments. storage cloud goes beyond securely
delivering new cloud efficiencies and cost savings to drive fundamental innovation for lasting
marketplace advantage.

IBM provides several service offerings as part of the IBM storage cloud family, supporting
public, private, and hybrid cloud delivery models. The offerings are shown in Figure 3-7 on
page 58.

Chapter 3. IBM storage cloud solutions 57

5250_Ch03_StorageCloud.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

IBM storage cloud offerings

Cloud Enabled Cloud Native

Scalable Elastic

+
Virtualized Multi-tenant
Automated Lifecycle Integrated Lifecycle
Integ
Heterogeneous Infrastructure Stand
Standardized Infrastructure

Existing Emerging
Middleware Platform
Workloads Workloads

Compatibility with existing systems Exploitation of new environments

“Systems of Record” “System of Engagement”

IBM SoftLayer
IBM Cloud Managed Services

Figure 3-7 IBM storage cloud offerings

Figure 3-7 shows the SoftLayer and cloud managed services strengths to highlight the broad
scope of the two offerings. The overlapping bars at the bottom of the figure illustrate that there
are functional similarities between the offerings.

You can think of IBM Cloud Managed Services™ as ideal for:

 Requiring a highly built out and resilient, steady workload, transaction-oriented IT
infrastructure
 Suitable for traditional three tier traditional IT application models, that is, application,
middleware, and database
 Typical applications appropriate for IBM Cloud Managed Services are SAP, Oracle ERP
solutions, and similar database management systems

You can think of IBM SoftLayer as ideal for:

 Cloud native, internet native applications
 Associated requirements for internet scale, widely varying and quickly changing workload
levels
 Modern internet applications where resiliency is built into the application layer
 Web-centric, native cloud programming environments
 Bare metal server capability, allowing you the option and flexibility to load your own
software stack as appropriate for your needs
 Full self-service API control of all aspects of the client’s SoftLayer infrastructure to allow
the flexibility and control access to manage their SoftLayer infrastructure however the
client wants

Within each of these two complementary IBM Cloud Services offerings are many
individualized offerings, which include (but are not limited to):
Private Modular Cloud Patterns of expertise that can be purchased and applied
to your private, public, or hybrid cloud

58 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch03_StorageCloud.fm

IBM PureSystems as a ServiceNew ability to purchase portions of the IBM PureSystems

software stack running in off-premise, pay-per-use
version in IBM SoftLayer
Software as a Service Off-premise, pay-per-use ability uses IBM software
products inside SoftLayer: products that previously only
existed in on-premises versions. Examples include IBM
General Parallel File System

Figure 3-8 shows the high-level characteristics of IBM Cloud Managed Services and IBM
SoftLayer.

IBM Cloud Managed Services and IBM SoftLayer

IaaS Managed Other IaaS Managed Other

Capabilities Services Requirements Capabilities Services Requirements
Requirements Requirements

• Cloud Enabled • Managed • Data hosting • Cloud Native • Unmanaged • Hosted in US,
Applications location Netherlands,
• System p sensitive • Intel (Win / • Customer Singapore
• ITIL Linux) managed
• System x (Win through APIs
/ Linux) • Object
Storage
• Tier 1 storage

IBM Cloud Managed Services

Existing Emerging
Middleware Platform
Workloads Workloads

Compatibility with existing systems Exploitation of new environments

“Systems of Record” “System of Engagement”

Figure 3-8 BM Cloud Managed Services and IBM SoftLayer characteristics

Figure 3-8 highlights the major characteristics of IBM Cloud Managed Services and SoftLayer
to show the breadth of the offerings together. For example, the Managed Services
Requirements column shows the focus areas of Cloud Managed Services and SoftLayer.
Unmanaged is displayed for SoftLayer they also have options for managed services.

3.5.1 IBM SoftLayer

SoftLayer offers storage that is attached to compute servers, and also stand-alone storage as
a service. SoftLayer provides a complete object storage solution with OpenStack Swift that
includes powerful tagging, search, and indexing capabilities, so that a client can assign rich
metadata tags for ease of finding and serve objects when requested.

IBM is establishing SoftLayer as the foundation of the IBM cloud portfolio, as the scalable,
secure base for the global delivery of cloud services that span the IBM extensive middleware
and software as a service (SaaS) solutions. SoftLayer's flexibility and global network will also
facilitate faster development, deployment and delivery of mobile, analytic, social solutions as
you adopt cloud as a delivery platform for IT operations and manage your business.

Here are some of the features of SoftLayer:

Chapter 3. IBM storage cloud solutions 59

5250_Ch03_StorageCloud.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

 Complete self-service capability to acquire, spin up, allocate, and de-allocate IT

infrastructure for public, private, and hybrid clouds
 Wide choice and flexibility in options in the specific infrastructure to be provisioned,
including bare metal server capability
 APIs are provided to manage all aspects of the SoftLayer provisioned infrastructure as
wanted by IT users and administrators

For more information about IBM SoftLayer, see the following website:

http://www.ibm.com/cloud-computing/us/en/softlayer.html

SoftLayer is designed to support “provision your own automated” cloud environment, from
private dedicated servers (including bare metal) to shared (public) multi-tenant model,
pay-as-you-go. Figure 3-9 illustrates the SoftLayer infrastructure.

SoftLayer an IBM Company

Cloud agility – Robust network Scalable common Pay-as-you-go

Complete Control
Build YO Cloud with secure access hardware building blocks

SoftLayer SoftLayer SoftLayer

A B

Dedicated (bare metal) cloud Dedicated private cloud services Shared public cloud services
(virtualized) (virtualized)

Figure 3-9 IBM SoftLayer

3.5.2 IBM Cloud Managed Services

On February 24, 2014, IBM renamed the former IBM SmartCloud Enterprise+ to its new
name: IBM Cloud Managed Services.

IBM Cloud Managed Services is a multitenant, IBM hosted, IaaS cloud-delivery offering that
is built on an enterprise class infrastructure with an architectural design capable of supporting
workloads, which require 99.5% and higher availability. IBM currently delivers these cloud
services out of 12 data centers located worldwide. Current technology is implemented on
high performance tier 1 XIV storage arrays within a resilient, SAN Volume Controller
virtualized, SAN fabric, which includes options for local and remote mirroring in support of
high availability and disaster recovery implementations.

IBM Cloud Managed Services supports both vertical and horizontal scaling workloads with
the capability of delivering robust storage solutions for demanding transactional systems.
Using automation for service activation, IBM Cloud Managed Services provides managed
service capabilities with rapid storage capacity provisioning activation (days versus weeks)
based on formal availability service-level agreements. This offering affords IBM clients the
flexibility of a smaller up-front commitment and provides enterprise-class infrastructure to
facilitate growth.

IBM Cloud Managed Services added the following important new features:
 Lite Sites and Remote Pods. Gives clients the ultimate in choice of deployment options in
an IBM data center and can be set up in any country

60 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch03_StorageCloud.fm

 Disaster Recovery. Provides fail over to and fail back from a secondary site.
 Supports new standards:
– HIPAA Compliance for the healthcare industry
– PCI Compliance for credit card transactions or handling of personal information
 New storage options enable support of dedicated servers for SAP HANA and Oracle
databases on Intel servers

IBM Cloud Managed Services continues to provide the following key features and capabilities:
 VMWare, IBM AIX, x86, or Power platform
 Resilient dual fabric FC SAN
 Tier 1 enterprise class storage
 Storage Zoning + Hypervisor isolation
 Production level enterprise transactional application full stack enablement
 Multitenant managed hosting
 Approximately 1-day provisioning activation
 Complete ITIL process support
 Client ITSM Integration, integrated across the client’s non-cloud and cloud environments
 Formal SLA support for 98.5 - 99.9% image availability
 Local and remote mirroring options
 Service management above and below the hypervisor
 Integrated backup and recovery service
 Optional tape encryption and off-site tape capability
 Scheduled separate guest OS-based Tivoli Storage Manager backup to prevent
cross-contamination of backup data
 Shared or dedicated managed environments
 Standard set of software images (OS, middle ware, databases) offered in fixed sizes and
SLA packages
 Server create, modify, and destroy requests through web portal as pre-approved changes
 Cloud-based ITIL management processes:
– Image lifecycle
– Asset/license
– Configuration

IBM Cloud Managed Services (CMS) is designed to support enterprise class workloads and
includes a full suite of managed services. Figure 3-10 illustrates the CMS infrastructure.

Chapter 3. IBM storage cloud solutions 61

5250_Ch03_StorageCloud.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

IBM Cloud Managed

naged Services
ices

ITIL management, Security Availability and Technology SLA through

support and and isolation performance platform operating system
deployment

Enterprise+
Enterprise+
B A B

Dedicated cloud Shared cloud services

Figure 3-10 IBM Cloud Managed Services

62 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch03_StorageCloud.fm

3.6 IBM Cloud Orchestrator

IBM Cloud Orchestrator provides an open and extensible cloud management platform for
managing heterogeneous hybrid environments. The software integrates provisioning,
metering, usage, and accounting in addition to monitoring and capacity management of cloud
services.

With IBM Cloud Orchestrator, you can manage your cloud infrastructure.

IBM Cloud Orchestrator helps you with end-to-end service deployment across infrastructure
and platform layers. It also provides integrated IT workflow capabilities for process automation
and IT governance, resource monitoring, and cost management. The product offers you an
extensible approach to integration with existing environments such as network management
tools. It facilitates integration with customer-specific service management processes, such as
those defined in the IT infrastructure library (ITIL).

Two editions of Cloud Orchestrator: IBM Cloud Orchestrator and IBM Cloud Orchestrator
Enterprise Edition, which also includes Monitoring and Cost Management.

IBM Cloud Orchestrator architecture

IBM Cloud Orchestrator is a comprehensive product that integrates the capabilities of several
other IBM solutions. The main components of IBM Cloud Orchestrator are the process engine
and the corresponding modeling user interface, which is used to create processes.

IBM Cloud Orchestrator bundles all these products and components and provides processes
that are required to implement the domain-specific functions as shown in Figure 3-11.

Figure 3-11 Components of IBM Cloud Orchestrator

Major component roles

IBM Cloud Orchestrator includes the following components:
 Infrastructure-as-a-Service (IaaS). The IaaS component is responsible for managing
access to compute, storage and networking resources in the virtual environment.
 Software stacks. With software stacks represent, if you use one or more virtual systems,
you can also specify multiple software packages to be deployed upon the first boot of
those systems.

Chapter 3. IBM storage cloud solutions 63

5250_Ch03_StorageCloud.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

 Patterns. The Patterns component provides a graphical editor that allows the user to
describe multiple virtual systems, each with a base image and set of software to be
installed, and then specify the relationships and configuration scripts necessary to
connect those systems together.
 Workflow orchestration. The Workflow Orchestration component provides a graphical
editor that allows the user to easily customize and extend the procedures that are followed
when a user request is initiated. In addition, it also provides the facilities to customize the
self-service catalog so that users have access to a variety of service request types that
they can access
 IBM Cloud Orchestration Catalog. The IBM Cloud Orchestrator Catalog is a publicly
accessible website where various forms of automation can be downloaded and used
within IBM Cloud Orchestrator
 Service management. This role provides optional additional management functions that
are included in IBM Cloud Orchestrator Enterprise Edition. It also highlights the ability to
integrate through Workflow Orchestration other management tools and disciplines that
may be important within your environment.
 Development tools. This role provides the ability to integrate developer tools from IBM
Rational® Team Concert™ and a set of plug-ins within Cloud Continuous Delivery such as
that a user can automate a “continuous delivery pipeline” from check-in of code, through
build, deployment, test, and promotion

IBM Cloud Orchestrator features and benefits

IBM Cloud Orchestrator provides the following features and benefits:
 Pattern-based cloud delivery
 Designing business processes
 Self-service user interface
 Administration user interface
 Topology and Orchestration Specification for Cloud Application (TOSCA) support
 Cost management
 Monitoring

For more information, see the IBM Cloud Orchestrator information in the IBM Knowledge
Center:

http://www.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/SS4KMC/welcome?lang=en

3.7 IBM cloud disaster recovery solutions

Every business knows that recovering from floods, fires, and other major disasters is
expensive. However, more frequent disruptions, such as hardware failures, security breaches
and routine power outages, can as much or more in both financial loss and reputational harm.

Organizations have relied on the level of service that is required. It is typically measured by
two recovery objectives:
 Recovery time objective (RTO). The amount of time between an outage and restoration of
operations.
 Recovery point objective (RPO). The point in time where data is restored and reflects the
amount of data that will be ultimately lost during the recovery process.

See Figure 3-12.

64 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch03_StorageCloud.fm

Figure 3-12 Measuring the level of service that is required by RPO and RTO

There are two disaster recovery models: dedicated and shared. Organizations are forced to
make a tradeoff between cost and speed to recovery, as illustrated in Figure 3-13

Figure 3-13 Traditional disaster recovery approaches included shared and dedicated models

In a dedicated disaster recovery model, the infrastructure is dedicated to a single

organization. This type of disaster recovery can offer a faster time to recovery compared to
other traditional models because the IT infrastructure is mirrored at the disaster recovery site
and is ready to be called upon in the event of a disaster. While this model can reduce RTO
because the hardware and software are preconfigured, it does not eliminate all delays. The
process is still dependent on receiving a current data image, which involves transporting
physical tapes and a data restoration process. This approach is also costly because the
hardware sits idle when not being used for disaster recovery. As shown in Figure 3-14 on
page 66, data restoration can take up to 72 hours including the tape retrieval, travel, and
loading process.

Chapter 3. IBM storage cloud solutions 65

5250_Ch03_StorageCloud.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Figure 3-14 Time to recovery with a dedicated infrastructure

In a shared disaster recovery model, the infrastructure is shared among multiple

organizations. Shared disaster recovery is designed to be more cost effective, since the
off-site backup infrastructure is shared between multiple organizations. After a disaster is
declared, the hardware, operating system, and application software at the disaster site must
be configured from the ground up to match the IT site that has declared a disaster, and this
process can take hours or even days as shown in Figure 3-15.

Figure 3-15 Time to recovery with a shared infrastructure

Traditional disaster recovery methods also rely on “declaring a disaster” to use the backup
infrastructure during events such as hurricanes, tsunamis, floods, or fires. However, most
application availability interruptions are due to more mundane everyday occurrences. While
organizations need to plan for the worst, they also must plan for the more likely problems,
such as cut power lines, server hardware failures, and security breaches.

Figure 3-16 on page 67 shows that the kinds of disruptions that IBM has helped its customers
respond to over the past few years. While weather is the cause of slightly more than half of
the disasters that are declared, almost 50 percent of the declarations are due to other causes.
These statistics are from IBM clients who declared a disaster.

66 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch03_StorageCloud.fm

Figure 3-16 Types of business interruptions

Consider how long it will take to get back online if critical servers go down. Also consider
whether you have the resources to recovery quickly. Unexpected disruptions can severely
affect your operations, resulting in lost revenues and disgruntled customers. You need proven
and cost-effective cloud disaster recovery solutions that get your business up and running in
minutes, day or night.

Cloud-based business resilience approach

Cloud computing offers an attractive alternative to traditional disaster recovery. “The Cloud” is
inherently a shared infrastructure: a pooled set of resources with the infrastructure cost is
distributed across everyone who contracts for the cloud service. This shared nature makes
the cloud an ideal model for disaster recovery. Because all of the organizations rely on the
cloud for backup and recovery, it is unlikely to need the infrastructure at the same time, costs
can be reduced and the cloud can speed recovery time as shown in Figure 3-17.

Figure 3-17 Speed to recovery using cloud computing

Cloud-based business resilience managed services as shown in Figure 3-18 on page 68 are
designed to provide a balance of economical shared physical recovery with the speed of
dedicated infrastructure. Because the server images and data are continuously replicated,
recovery time can be reduced dramatically to less than an hour, and, in many cases, to
minutes or even seconds. However, the costs are more consistent with the shared recovery.

Chapter 3. IBM storage cloud solutions 67

5250_Ch03_StorageCloud.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Figure 3-18 A cloud-based approach to business resilience

IBM Cloud Resilience offers a suite of services that help you plan and manage
enterprise-wide resilience with a robust, automation, and easy testing solution.
 Cloud backup
 Cloud data virtualization
 Cloud Server recovery
 Cloud Email management

3.7.1 Cloud-managed backup

IBM Resiliency Cloud Managed Backup service protects data with a cost-effective managed
backup solution. The services ensure that mission-critical data is protected, secure, and
available at all times. Services include private or public cloud-based, on-site or off-site data
backup. This cloud-managed backup is a solution that is scalable and flexible that can
automatically handle changing data footprints, keep up with compliance requirements and
reduce the total cost of ownership (TCO).

IBM Resiliency Cloud Managed Backup provides the following benefits:

 Flexible delivery choices
 Reduces total cost of ownership
 Technological efficiencies
 Redundancy infrastructures
 Global reach
 Interactive portal

3.7.2 Cloud Data Virtualization

IBM Resiliency Cloud Data Virtualization service enhances data protection within a managed
environment by providing instant recovery of critical data without generating multiple copies.
One copy can be used for backup, server replication, application recovery, test or
development. This service can better protect data while also cutting costs, reclaiming storage,
capacity and improving utilization.

68 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch03_StorageCloud.fm

IBM Resiliency Cloud Data Virtualization provides the following benefits:

 Reduces total cost of ownership
 More efficient regulatory
 More flexible solutions
 Faster recovery times
 Enhance ease of use
 Tested leadership
 More predictable costs

3.7.3 Cloud server recovery

IBM Resiliency Cloud Virtualized Server Recovery service is a fully managed, around the
clock solution that is designed to support application continuity. This service ensures the most
critical applications stay safe, functional, and accessible during and after an outage.

IBM Resiliency Cloud Virtualized Server Recovery provides the following benefits:
 Faster recovery time
 Reduced risk of failure
 Predictable costs
 Streamline recovery
 A fully managed service
 Supports cloud and traditional environments

3.7.4 Cloud email management

IBM Resiliency Cloud Email Management Express service offers a range of integrated
services to protect, archive, and access organization’s email in the event of a disruption or
legal discovery requirement. The service is built on a managed platform that combines the
virtually maintenance-free benefits of on-demand services with the integration capabilities of
on-promise software.

IBM Resiliency Cloud Email Management Express provides the following benefits:
 Continuous access to email
 Emergency or crisis notification
 Emergency or crisis notification
 Simplified archiving
 Mobile continuity
 Enhanced data protection
 Software and system support
 Reduced data stores

3.7.5 More information

Here is additional storage-related IBM Cloud service information:
 IBM Cloud Resiliency Disaster Recovery:
http://www.ibm.com/services/us/en/it-services/business-continuity/cloud-disaste
r-recovery/
 IBM Resiliency Cloud Managed Backup:
http://www.ibm.com/services/us/en/it-services/business-continuity/cloud-managed
-backup/index.html

Chapter 3. IBM storage cloud solutions 69

5250_Ch03_StorageCloud.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

 IBM Resiliency Cloud Data Virtualization:

http://www.ibm.com/services/us/en/it-services/business-continuity/cloud-data-vi
rtualization/index.html
 IBM Resiliency Cloud Virtualized Server Recovery:
http://www.ibm.com/services/us/en/it-services/business-continuity/cloud-server-
recovery/index.html
 IBM Resiliency Cloud Email Management Express:
http://www.ibm.com/services/us/en/it-services/business-continuity/ibm-email-man
agement/index.html
 IBM Disaster recovery options:
http://www.ibm.com/ibm/disaster-recovery-options/sg/en/overview/
 IBM Private, Public, and Hybrid Cloud Storage Solutions, REDP-4873
http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/abstracts/redp4873.html?Open
 IBM SmartCloud: Building a Cloud Enabled Data Center, REDP-4893
http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/abstracts/redp4893.html?Open

70 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch04_PureSystems.fm

Chapter 4. IBM PureSystems overview

To meet current IT and business demands, IBM is introducing a new category of systems.
These systems combine the flexibility of general purpose systems, the elasticity of a cloud
computing environment, and the simplicity of an appliance that is tuned to the workload. IBM
PureSystems solutions are the building blocks of those capabilities. This new category of
systems represents the collective knowledge of thousands of deployments, established
guidelines, best practices, innovative thinking, and distilled expertise.

IBM PureSystems include integration across compute, storage, networking, and platform
middleware for physical and virtual resources. These systems also include built-in expertise
from IBM factory pre-configuration, integration, and testing. This simplified experience
enables clients to deliver new cloud services and applications faster and with improved
economics over traditional IT.

The IBM PureSystems offerings are optimized for performance and virtualized for efficiency.
These systems offer a no-compromise design with system-level upgradeability. IBM
PureSystems offerings are built for cloud, containing “built-in” flexibility and simplicity.

Figure 4-1 on page 72 shows the IBM PureSystems offerings.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999, 2015. All rights reserved. 71

5250_Ch04_PureSystems.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Infrastructure Application Platform Data Platform

Delivering Cloud Infrastructure Delivering Cloud Application Delivering Big Data Platform
Services Platform Services Services

Figure 4-1 IBM PureSystems family

As shown in Figure 4-1:

 IBM PureFlex System combines servers, storage, networking, and virtualization
capabilities into a single, unified, and upgradeable infrastructure system.
 IBM PureApplication System provides a flexible platform that is designed to ease the
process of deploying, customizing, and managing middleware and applications.
 IBM PureData System integrates specialized hardware and software components for
transactional, operational, and deep analytical workloads.

Figure 4-2 illustrates the PureSystem wheel of expert integrated systems.

Systems with integrated expertise and built for cloud

Built-in Expertise Integration by

Capturing and
Design
automating what Deeply integrating and
experts do – from tuning hardware and
the infrastructure software – in a ready-to-
patterns to the go workload optimized
application patterns system

Simplified Experience

Making every part of the IT lifecycle easier - with

integrated management of the entire system and a
broad open ecosystem of optimized solutions

Figure 4-2 The IBM PureSystems wheel

IBM PureSystems offerings are designed to deliver value in the following ways:

72 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch04_PureSystems.fm

 Built-in expertise: Systems must capture and automate best practices and expertise,
which reduces manual steps that affect a project’s time to value with an open architecture
and allows participating solution providers to optimize their applications workloads.
 Integration by design: All hardware and software components must be integrated by
design, tuned in the lab, and pre-packaged in the factory into a single, ready-to-go system
that is optimized for the business task.
 Simplified experience: IT staff and the lines of business that use IT realize a simplified
systems lifecycle. Collections of hardware, middleware, and application components no
longer need to be separately procured, configured, tuned, and managed. IBM
PureSystems are ordered, unpacked, plugged in, and managed as a single system from a
centralized interface.

For more information, see the following information:

 IBM Expert Integrated Systems
http://www.ibm.com/ibm/puresystems/us/en/index.html
 Overview of IBM PureSystems, TIPS0892
http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/abstracts/tips0892.html?Open
 IBM PureApplication System Data Sheet
http://public.dhe.ibm.com/common/ssi/ecm/wa/en/wad12349usen/WAD12349USEN.PDF

4.1 IBM PureFlex System

The IBM PureFlex System is an infrastructure system that provides a fully integrated
computing platform. It combines servers, storage, networking, virtualization, and
management into a single structure. Its built-in expertise enables organizations to manage
and deploy integrated patterns of virtual and hardware resources through a unified
management console. PureFlex System is ideally suited for customers who want a system
that delivers the simplicity of an integrated solution while still able to tune middleware and the
runtime environment.

Chapter 4. IBM PureSystems overview 73

5250_Ch04_PureSystems.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

IBM PureFlex System implements the IaaS layer and can provide higher levels of control,
efficiency, and operating agility. By using built-in virtualization and workload placement that is
based on resource availability, the infrastructure system enables automated scaling of
resources and true workload mobility. This combination enables businesses to rapidly deploy
IT services at a reduced cost. Moreover, it enables deep integration and central management
through a comprehensive, open-choice infrastructure system. It dramatically reduces the
skills and training that are required for managing and deploying the system. Figure 4-3 shows
the integrated infrastructure of the PureFlex systems.

IBM PureFlex System

• Integrated management across

all resources
• Factory-integrated
F • Workload optimization across POWER
compute,
c storage, and x86 environments
networking,
n • Integrated v7000 storage
management
m • Intelligent data placement across
• Heterogeneous
H virtualized storage
environment
e support • Pre-loaded AIX and VIOS partitions
• Pre-configured fibre switch zones
• Built-in
B cloud • Network pre-configured based on IBM
management
m integrated expertise
• Lab Services customized integration
• Enhanced integrated support
Integrated Infrastructure
Delivering Infrastructure Services

Figure 4-3 The PureFlex System

The IBM PureFlex System is available in the following configurations:

 IBM PureFlex System Express is designed for small and medium-sized businesses and is
the most affordable entry point for PureFlex System.
 IBM PureFlex System Standard is built for application servers with supporting storage and
networking, and is designed to support key ISV solutions.
 IBM PureFlex System Enterprise is optimized for transactional and database systems. It
has built-in redundancy for highly reliable and resilient operation to support the most
critical workloads.

The PureFlex System is built from no-compromise building blocks that are based on IBM
technologies that support open standards and offer roadmaps for integration with multiple
systems. It is designed to give control and choice without increasing complexity. The
customers are not limited to a single architecture or vendor’s middleware; they can choose
from a broad range of servers, operating systems and hypervisors, and design systems that
are truly optimized for their needs. Customers also can consolidate different workloads from
many resource-consuming servers onto a single PureFlex System and control it all from a
unified interface.

74 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch04_PureSystems.fm

These configurations are summarized in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1 IBM PureFlex System configurations

Component IBM PureFlex System IBM PureFlex System IBM PureFlex System
Express Standard Enterprise

IBM PureFlex System 42U 1 1 1

Rack

IBM Flex System Enterprise 1 1 1

Chassis

IBM Flex System Fabric 1 1 2 with both port-count

EN4093 10 Gb Scalable upgrades
Switch

IBM Flex System FC3171 8 Gb 1 2 2

SAN Switcha

IBM Flex System FC5022 1 2 2

24-port 16 Gb ESB SAN
Scalable Switch a

IBM Flex System Manager 1 1 1

Node

IBM Flex System Manager IBM Flex System Manager IBM Flex System Manager Flex System Manager
software license with 1-year service and Advanced with 3-year Advanced with 3-year
support service and support service and support

Chassis Management Module 2 2 2

Chassis power supplies 2/6 4/6 6/6

(std/max)

Chassis 80 mm fan modules 4/8 6/8 8/8

(std/max)

IBM Flex System V7000 Yes (redundant controller) Yes (redundant controller) Yes (redundant controller)
Storage Nodeb

IBM Storwize V7000 Disk Yes (redundant controller) Yes (redundant controller) Yes (redundant controller)
Systemb

IBM Storwize V7000 Software  Base with 1-year  Base with 3-year  Base with 3-year
software maintenance software maintenance software maintenance
agreement agreement agreement
 Optional Real Time  Real Time  Real Time
Compression Compression Compression
a. Select either the IBM Flex System FC3171 8 Gb SAN Switch or IBM Flex System FC5022 24-port 16 Gb ESB
SAN Scalable Switch module.
b. Select either the IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node installed inside the Enterprise chassis or the external IBM
Storwize V7000 Disk System.

The fundamental building blocks of IBM PureFlex System solutions are the IBM Flex System
Enterprise Chassis complete with compute nodes, networking, and storage.

For more information, see the following link:

http://www.ibm.com/ibm/puresystems/us/en/pf_pureflex.html

For information about PureFlex solutions, see the following link:

Chapter 4. IBM PureSystems overview 75

5250_Ch04_PureSystems.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

http://www.ibm.com/systems/pureflex/solutions.html

4.2 IBM PureApplication System

IBM PureApplication System uses IBM PureFlex System infrastructure as a foundation to
support high workloads, simplify infrastructure management, and improve the application’s
lifecycle. This workload-aware, flexible platform is easy to deploy, customize, manage, and
operate in a traditional or private cloud environment. Figure 4-4 on page 76 shows the
features of a PureApplication system.

IBM PureApplication System

Pre-Integrated
Transactional workloads
•Pre-installed DB2 and WebSphere
•Pre-configured and tuned
Compute •Pre-configured monitoring
•Pre-configured security
•Pre-integrated cloud
Virtualization Storage

Pattern based deployments

•Policy based scaling
•Middleware-aware management
Management
•Virtual appliance, system, and
Networking
Appliance application patterns

Benefits
•Faster time to value
•Significantly simpler deployments
Tools Middleware •Lower risk and errors

Cloud

Figure 4-4 The IBM PureApplication System

IBM PureApplication System implements the Platform as a Service (PaaS) layer to provide
superior IT economics. With the PureApplication System, customers can create their own
patterns of software, middleware, and virtual resources. Customers can provision and share
these patterns within a unique framework that is shaped by IT guidelines, best practices, and
industry standards. These standards were gathered from many years of IBM experience with
thousands of clients around the world and are infused throughout the system.

Figure 4-5 shows the IBM Patterns of Expertise leverages decades of clients and partner
engagements that are captured, tested and refined in the development lap and fully built in to
the system and pattern-based deployment technology.

76 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch04_PureSystems.fm

Data Management
Solutions

Software Delivery and

Lifecycle
Asset and Facilities
Management

Business
Analytics & Data
Warehousing Social
Collaboration

Security, Risk Management ,

Compliance
App
Infrastructure
Mobile Development
and Connectivity

Business Connectivity,
Process Integration
Mgmt and SOA

Figure 4-5 IBM patterns

These patterns help you achieve the following types of value:

 Agility: As you seek to innovate to bring products and services to market faster, you need
fast time-to-value. Expertise built into a solution can eliminate manual steps, automate
delivery, and support innovation.
 Efficiency: To reduce costs and conserve valuable resources, get the most from your
systems in terms of energy efficiency, simple management, and fast, automated response
to problems. With built-in expertise, you can optimize your critical business applications
and get the most out of your investments.
 Increased simplicity: You need a less complex environment. Patterns of expertise can help
you easily consolidate diverse servers, storage, and applications onto an
easier-to-manage, integrated system.
 Control: With optimized patterns of expertise, you can accelerate cloud implementations
to lower risk by improving security and reducing human error.

Chapter 4. IBM PureSystems overview 77

5250_Ch04_PureSystems.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Figure 4-6 shows a high level overview of the IBM PureApplication System.

Small x86
86 / Power Large x86 Large POWER
Small rack (25U) Enterprise rack: (42U) Increased:
• 32 & 64 core options • 96,192, 384 & 608 core options •Performance and Efficiency
• 30% less power consumption •Resiliency
• Smaller footprint •Choice of OS

• All models are integrated by design and share the same built-in expertise and simplified experience
• Upgrade to larger configurations in a rack without taking an outage

Figure 4-6 IBM PureApplication System overview

IBM PureApplication System is available in four configurations. These configuration options

enable clients to choose the size and compute power that meets needs for application
infrastructure. They can upgrade to the next size when their organization requires more
capacity, and in most cases, can do so without taking an application downtime.

IBM PureApplication System is outside the scope of this book. For more information, see the
following information:
 Adopting IBM PureApplication System V1.0, SG24-8113
 IBM PureApplication System - System Options
http://www.ibm.com/software/info/pureapplication/system-options.html
 IBM Knowledge Center - PureApplication System W2700 2.0.0 Hardware Overview
http://www.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/SSCRSX_2.0.0/doc/installguide/c_solu
tiondesc.dita

4.3 IBM PureData System

The IBM PureData System is a platform that is optimized exclusively for delivering data
services to today’s demanding applications. It provides data management expertise for each
type of workload, such as automated pattern-based deployment and management of highly
reliable and scalable transactional database services. It contains hardware and software
capabilities that are designed and optimized for specific high-performance data workloads,
such as data filtering by using programmable hardware (FPGAs) for ultrafast execution of
analytic queries. The IBM PureData System provides a fully integrated management console
for the entire system, with integrated system upgrades and maintenance.

Figure 4-7 shows IBM PureData System that is optimized for delivering data services for
today’s demanding applications.

78 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch04_PureSystems.fm

IBM PureData System

Optimized for
data services: Workload optimized
ƒ Transactional performance
ƒ Analytics
Data load ready in hours
Expert integrated:
ƒ Data platform Integrated management
ƒ Infrastructure
ƒ Unified platform management
Automated maintenance
ƒ Built-in expertise

Single point of support

Data Platform
Delivering Data Services

Figure 4-7 IBM PureData System

Like IBM PureApplication System, it offers built-in expertise, integration by design, and a
simplified experience throughout its life cycle, with the following features:
 Built-in expertise:
Data management best practices are provided for each workload. PureData System
delivers automated pattern-based deployment and management of highly reliable and
scalable database services.
 Integration by design:
Hardware, storage, and software capabilities are designed and optimized for specific high
performance data workloads such as patented data filtering using programmable
hardware for ultrafast execution of analytic queries without the need for indices.
 Simplified experience:
The PureData System provides single part procurement with no assembly required (ready
to load data in hours), open integration with third party software, integrated management
console for the entire system, single line of support, and integrated system upgrades and
maintenance.

PureData System comes in different models that have been designed, integrated, and
optimized to deliver data services to today's demanding applications with simplicity, speed,
and lower cost.

4.3.1 IBM PureData System for Transactions

PureData System for Transactions contains factory-integrated and optimized server, storage,
network and software resources selected specifically for online transactional processing
(OLTP) workloads. They are designed, integrated, and tuned to support transactional
processing applications that require high performance, high scalability, and high throughput
with fast response time.

Table 4-2 shows the configurations available for PureData System for Transactions.

Chapter 4. IBM PureSystems overview 79

5250_Ch04_PureSystems.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Table 4-2 PureData System for Transactions

Specifications Small Medium Large
(Third (1/3) (Half Rack) (Full Rack)
Rack)

IBM Flex System Enterprise Chassis 1 1 2

IBM Flex System x240 Compute Nodes 6 12 24

 Two Intel Xeon E5-2670 8C 2.6 GHz processors
 One EN4132 2-Port 10Gb Adapter with RoCE support
 One FC3172 2-port 8Gb FC Adapter

IBM System Networking RackSwitch G8264 48 ports SFP+, 4 2 2 2

ports QSFP+

Total cores 96 192 384

Total memory 1.5 TB 3.1 TB 6.2 TB

IBM Storwize V7000 Disk Controller Enclosure 1 2 4

IBM Storwize V7000 Disk expansion Enclosures 1 2 4

Unformatted SDD storage capacity (400 GB drives) 4.8 TB 9.6 TB 19.2 TB

Unformatted HDD storage Capacity (900 GB drives) 32TB 64 TB 128 TB

Power consumption 5.6 KW 9 KW 16.6 KW

Cooling 19,000 BTU/Hr 31,000 BTU/Hr 57,000 BTU/Hr

Weight 531 kg 636 kg 950 kg

4.3.2 IBM PureData System for Analytics

PureData System for Analytics, powered by Netezza® technology, is a simple data appliance
for serious analytics. It simplifies and optimizes performance of data services for analytic
applications, enabling very complex algorithms to run in minutes not hours. This system is
designed specifically for running complex analytics on very large data volumes.

Designed specifically for running complex analytics on large data volumes. This system is a
high-performance, hardware-accelerated, massively parallel system that enables clients to
perform analytics on big data. It provides an easy-to-use data warehouse appliance that runs
business intelligence (BI) algorithms extremely fast and requires minimal administration or
tuning.

PureData System for Analytics delivers the proven performance, scalability, intelligence, and
simplicity aligned to business needs. It is a low cost option requiring minimal ongoing
administration or tuning, for a low total cost of ownership (TCO).

Table 4-3 shows the specifications of the PureData System for Analytics.

Table 4-3 PureData System for Analytics

Specifications Single rack systems Multi-rack systems

IBM PureData System N10001-002 N1001-005 N1001-101 2 racks 3+ racks

for Analytics

Racks 1 1 1 2 3-10

Active S-Blades 4 7 14 28 # racks x 14

80 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch04_PureSystems.fm

Specifications Single rack systems Multi-rack systems

IBM PureData System N10001-002 N1001-005 N1001-101 2 racks 3+ racks

for Analytics

CPU cores 32 56 112 224 # racks x 112

FPGA cores 32 56 112 224 # racks x 112

User data 32 TB 64 TB 128 TB 256 TB # racks x 128 TB

Power/rack 2820 W 3960 W 7635 W 7400 W 7000 W

Cooling/rack (BTU/Hr) 9600 BTU/Hr 13,500 BTU/Hr 26,100 BTU/Hr 25,500 BTU/Hr 24,000 BTU/Hr

Weight/Rack 454 kg 590 kg 907 kg 907 kg 907 kg

4.3.3 IBM PureData System for Operational Analytics

The PureData System for Operational Analytics is a data warehouse system for delivering
insights to business operations for real-time decision-making. It is optimized to handle
complex analytics and designed to handle large numbers of concurrent operational queries.

With in-database analytics, you run analytics on your data where it resides, in the warehouse.
thus eliminating the time, cost, and risk associated with copying data out of the warehouse to
analyze it.

Optimized for the right balance of analytics performance and operational query throughput,
this PureData System delivers rapid insight into high volumes of fast-moving data. It was
designed for applications that must analyze multiple business variables to perform real-time
decision making. By using multidimensional cubing services over a relational data warehouse
schema, it optimizes performance for online analytical processing (OLAP) queries, providing
more power for users to analyze data.

Table 4-4 shows the specifications of the PureData System for Analytics.

Table 4-4 IBM PureData System for Operational Analytics

Specification Extra Small Small Medium Large

Contains:  Foundation rack  Foundation rack  Foundation  Foundation

 1 foundation node + 1/3 Rack + 2/3 Rack + full rack
 1 foundation node  1 foundation node  1 foundation node
 1 data node  2 data nodes  3 data nodes

Cores 32 64 80 96

Memory (GB) 256 512 640 768

SSD Storage 4.8 TB 9.6 TB 12 TB 14.4 TB

HDD Unformatted 64.8 TB 151.2 TB 237.6 TB 324 TB

storage

HDD RAID capacity 54 TB 126 TB 198 TB 270 TB

User Data 29.7 TB 69.3 TB 108.9 TB 148.5 TB

uncompressed

Primary Servers 1 2 3 4

Standby Servers 1 2 2 2

Chapter 4. IBM PureSystems overview 81

5250_Ch04_PureSystems.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Specification Extra Small Small Medium Large

Uncompressed disk 3.2 GB/s 9.6 GB/s 16 GB/s 22.4 GB/s

bandwidth
 3.2 GB/s for
foundation node
 6.4 GB/s for
data node

Database Disk 34K IOPS 57K IOPS 148K IOPS 205K IOPS

Uncompressed 1,161 GB/h 3,484 GB/h 5807 GB/h 8130 GB/h

Data Load Rate

Compressed Data 890 GB/h 2,670 GB/h 4,450 GB/h 6,230 GB/h
Load Rate

Database software IBM Data Warehousing and analytics software entitlements included
and Tools

Processors and OS IBM POWER7® with AIX

Power (Watts max) 6196 6196 6196 6196

foundation Rack

Power (Watts max) - 4647 7551 10,454

data Rack

BTU/h foundation 14160 14160 14160 14160

BTU/h data 11601 19543 27467

Weight Kg 658 Kg 658 Kg 658 Kg 658 Kg

Weight data rack - 567 Kg 749 Kg 976 Kg

(kg)

For more information about PureData Systems, see the following link:
http://www.ibm.com/ibm/puresystems/us/en/pf_puredata.html

4.4 IBM Flex System: The building blocks

IBM PureSystems such as the PureApplication and PureFlex system are built from reliable
IBM technology that supports open standards and offers confident road maps: the IBM Flex
System. It is designed for multiple generations of technology, supporting your workload today
while being ready for the demands of your business tomorrow.

4.4.1 Management
IBM Flex System Manager is designed to optimize the physical and virtual resources of the
IBM Flex System infrastructure while simplifying and automating repetitive tasks. It provides
easy system set-up procedures with wizards and built-in expertise, and consolidated
monitoring for all of your resources, including compute, storage, networking, virtualization,
and energy. IBM Flex System Manager provides core management functionality along with
automation. It is an ideal solution that allows you to reduce administrative expense and focus
your efforts on business innovation.

82 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch04_PureSystems.fm

A single user interface controls these features:

 Intelligent automation
 Resource pooling
 Improved resource utilization
 Complete management integration
 Simplified setup

4.4.2 Compute nodes

The compute nodes are designed to take advantage of the full capabilities of IBM POWER7
and Intel processors. This configuration offers the performance you need for your critical
applications.

With support for a range of hypervisors, operating systems, and virtualization environments,
the compute nodes provide the foundation for these applications:
 Virtualization solutions
 Database applications
 Infrastructure support
 Line of business applications

4.4.3 Storage
The storage capabilities of IBM Flex System give you advanced functionality with storage
nodes in your system, and take advantage of your existing storage infrastructure through
advanced virtualization.

Storage is available either integrated within the chassis using the IBM Flex System V7000
Storage Node that integrates inside the Flex System Chassis, or externally using the IBM
Storwize V7000, XIV, DS8000 series, Storwize V3700, DS3500 series, N Series, IBM Flash
Storage, Tape Library such as, TS3500, TS3310, TS3200, TS3100 and TS2900 Tape
autoloader.

IBM Flex System simplifies storage administration with a single user interface for all your
storage. The management console is integrated with the comprehensive management
system. These management and storage capabilities allow you to virtualize third-party
storage with non-disruptive migration of your current storage infrastructure. You can also take
advantage of intelligent tiering so you can balance performance and cost for your storage
needs. The solution also supports local and remote replication, and snapshots for flexible
business continuity and disaster recovery capabilities.

4.4.4 Networking
The range of available adapters and switches to support key network protocols allow you to
configure IBM Flex System to fit in your infrastructure. However, you can do so without
sacrificing being ready for the future. The networking resources in IBM Flex System are
standards-based, flexible, and fully integrated into the system. This combination gives you
no-compromise networking for your solution. Network resources are virtualized and managed
by workload. And these capabilities are automated and optimized to make your network more
reliable and simpler to manage.

IBM Flex Systems gives you these key networking capabilities:

 Supports the networking infrastructure you have today, including Ethernet, Fibre Channel,
FCoE, iSCSI and InfiniBand

Chapter 4. IBM PureSystems overview 83

5250_Ch04_PureSystems.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

 Offers industry-leading performance with 1 Gb, 10 Gb, and 40 Gb Ethernet; 8 Gb and

16 Gb Fibre Channel; and FDR InfiniBand
 Provides pay-as-you-grow scalability so you can add ports and bandwidth when needed

4.4.5 Infrastructure
The IBM Flex System Enterprise Chassis is the foundation of the offering, supporting
intelligent workload deployment and management for maximum business agility. The
14-node, 10U chassis delivers high-performance connectivity for your integrated compute,
storage, networking, and management resources. The chassis is designed to support
multiple generations of technology, and offers independently scalable resource pools for
higher utilization and lower cost per workload.

For more information about IBM Flex System, see the following link:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/pureflex/flex-converged-infrastructure.html

4.5 IBM Flex System overview

The IBM PureSystems are expert integrated system that are based on a new hardware and
software platform, IBM Flex System. Figure 4-8 shows the Flex System Manager
infrastructure. It provides a resource-oriented map view to monitor system health, work with
firmware inventory, and view environmental status (including thermal and power metrics). It
also provides a launch point for remote access tools to work with the operating system on
individual nodes.

IBM Flex System Manager

DServers DNetwork DStorage DVirtualization

Analyze and
Troubleshoot

Optimize IBM Flex Deploy

System
Manager
Server
Serv
Monitor and Maintain and
Alert Update

Secure
D EasyNetwork
to Use

Figure 4-8 IBM Flex System Manager® Infrastructure

D Integrated
D
IBM Flex System Manager includes the following high-level functions:
 Supports a comprehensive, pre-integrated system that is configured to optimize
performance and efficiency

84 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch04_PureSystems.fm

 Automated processes that are triggered by events simplify management and reduce
manual administrative tasks
 Centralized management reduces the skills and the number of steps it takes to manage
and deploy a system
 Enables comprehensive management and control of energy usage and costs
 Automates responses for a reduced need for manual tasks, such as custom actions and
filters, configure, edit, relocate, and automation plans
 Storage device discovery and coverage in integrated physical and logical topology views
 Full integration with server views, including virtual server views, which enables efficient
management of resources

4.5.1 IBM Flex System Manager

The IBM Flex System Manager (FSM) is a high performance scalable systems management
appliance with a preloaded software stack. As an appliance, the hardware is closed, on a
dedicated compute node platform, and designed to provide a specific purpose. It is intended
to configure, monitor, and manage IBM Flex System resources in multiple IBM Flex System
Enterprise Chassis (Enterprise Chassis), optimizing time-to-value. The FSM provides an
instant resource-oriented view of the Enterprise Chassis and its components, providing vital
information for real-time monitoring. Figure 4-9 on page 85 shows the IBM Flex System
Manager a fully integrated management solution.

IBM Flex System

• Full range of Intel and POWER

•Chassis processors – today and tomorrow
•Compute Nodes
• More memory for more virtualization
•Storage
• More networking bandwidth up to 2X
•Networking
• Feature On Demand network
•Flex System Manager
scalability
•Expansion
• More flash storage for VDI
• Integrated Storage options
Infrastructure Components • Integrated Management options

Open choice of architectures, hypervisors, environments –

designed for multiple generations of technology
Figure 4-9 The IBM Flex System Manager

An increased focus on optimizing time-to-value is evident in these features:

 Setup wizards, including initial setup wizards, provide intuitive and quick setup of the FSM
 The Chassis Map provides multiple view overlays to track health, firmware inventory, and
environmental metrics
 Configuration management for repeatable setup of compute, network, and storage
devices
 Remote presence application for remote access to compute nodes with single sign-on
 Quick search provides results as you type

Chapter 4. IBM PureSystems overview 85

5250_Ch04_PureSystems.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Beyond the physical world of inventory, configuration, and monitoring, IBM Flex System
Manager enables virtualization and workload optimization for a new class of computing:
 Resource utilization: Detects congestion, notification policies, and relocation of physical
and virtual machines that include storage and network configurations within the network
fabric
 Resource pooling: Pooled network switching, with placement advisors that consider VM
compatibility, processor, availability, and energy
 Intelligent automation: Automated and dynamic VM placement based on utilization,
energy, hardware predictive failure alerts, and host failures

Figure 4-10 shows the IBM Flex System Manager.

Figure 4-10 IBM Flex System Manager x240 M5

Table 4-5 Features of the IBM Flex System manager node specifications
Feature Description

Models 9532-x2x, 9532-x4x, 9532-x6x

Processor Up to two Intel processor E5-2600 v3 product family CPUs with 18 cores (2.3 GHz),
16 cores (2.3 GHz), 14 cores (up to 2.6 GHz), 12 cores (up to 2.6 GHz) or 10 cores
(up to 2.6 GHz), 8 cores (up to 3.2 GHz), 6 cores (up to 3.4 GHz), or up to 4 cores
(up to 3.5 GHz). Two QPI links up to 9.6 GBps each. Up to 2133 MHz memory
speed. Up to 45 MB L3 cache.

Memory Up to 24 DIMM sockets (12 DIMMs per processor). RDIMMs and LRDIMMs are
supported. Memory types cannot be intermixed. Memory speed up to 2133 MHz.
Four memory channels per processor (3 DIMMs per channel).

Disk Two 2.5-inch hot-swap SAS/SATA drive bays that support SAS, SATA, and SSDs.
Optional support for 2.5-inch NVMe Enterprise PCIe SSDs. Optional support for up
to four 1.8-inch SSDs in place of the two 2.5-inch bays. Up to 12 more 2.5-inch drive
bays with the optional Storage Expansion Node.

Integrated NIC Embedded dual-port 10 Gb Virtual Fabric Ethernet controller (Emulex BE3)
Dual-port 1 GbE Ethernet controller on a management adapter (Broadcom 5718)

Systems UEFI, IBM Integrated Management Module 2 (IMM2) with Renesas SH7758
Management controller, Predictive Failure Analysis, light path diagnostics panel, automatic
server restart, remote presence. Support for IBM Flex System Manager, IBM
Systems Director and Active Energy Manager, IBM Tools Center.

For more information, see Flex System x240 M5 Product Guide, TIPS1199

86 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch04_PureSystems.fm

4.5.2 IBM Flex System Enterprise Chassis

The IBM Flex System Enterprise Chassis offers compute, networking, and storage
capabilities far exceeding those currently available. With the ability to handle up 14 compute
nodes, intermixing IBM Power Systems™ and Intel x86, the Enterprise Chassis provides
flexibility and tremendous compute capacity in a 10-U package. Additionally, the rear of the
chassis accommodates four high speed networking switches. With interconnecting compute
nodes, networking, and storage using a high performance and scalable mid-plane, Enterprise
Chassis can support 40 Gb speeds.

The ability to support the workload demands of tomorrow’s workloads is built in with a new IO
architecture, which provides choice and flexibility in fabric and speed. With the ability to use
Ethernet, InfiniBand, FC, FCoE, and iSCSI, the Enterprise Chassis is uniquely positioned to
meet the growing and future IO needs of businesses both large and small.

Figure 4-11 shows the IBM Flex System Enterprise Chassis.

Integrated Enterprise Chassis

Front View Rear View

10U chassis 4 switch modules

14 bays Redundant CMMs
Integrated Storage Redundant power
Redundant cooling

• High physical density • Ease of cabling

• Positional awareness • Ease of insertion and removal
• Virtual FC and NIC address • High bandwidth, low latency networking
• Mixed processor support • Integrated management Ethernet
• Hot add, hot swap • Designed to support the future

Figure 4-11 he IBM Flex System Enterprise Chassis

4.5.3 Compute nodes

IBM Flex System offers compute nodes that vary in architecture, dimension, and capabilities.
Optimized for efficiency, density, performance, reliability, and security.

Figure 4-12 on page 88 shows the available compute nodes for Intel processors.

Chapter 4. IBM PureSystems overview 87

5250_Ch04_PureSystems.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Flex System x220 Compute Node Flex System x240 Compute Node

Dual Socket Intel E5-24xx Dual Socket E5-26xx

Flex System x222 Compute Node Flex System x440 Compute Node

(2) Systems Per Node Bay Quad Socket E5-46xx

Dual Socket Intel E5-24xx

Up to 28 Servers per Chassis

Flex System x880 Compute Node
ƒ 2S/ 48 DIMMs scalable to 8S/192 DIMMs
ƒ E7-28xx, 48xx, 88xx v2 processors
ƒ Advanced X6 RAS Features

Figure 4-12 Intel compute nodes

For more information about Intel compute nodes, see Flex System Products and Technology,
SG24-8255.

Figure 4-13 shows the available compute nodes for power processors

Flex System x24L Compute Node Flex System p270 Compute Node

Dual Socket IBM Power 7 Dual Socket Power 7+

Linux Workloads ONLY

Flex System p260 Compute Node Flex System p460 Compute Node

Dual Socket Intel Power 7+ Full Width Node

AIX, IBM I, Linux Workloads Quad Socket Power 7+

Figure 4-13 Power compute nodes

For more information about IBM POWER7+™ compute nodes, see IBM Flex System
Products and Technology for Power Systems, SG24-8256.

4.5.4 Expansion nodes

Expansion nodes can be attached to existing compute nodes, allowing expansion of the
nodes capabilities of either locally attached storage or PCI-E expansion.

88 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch04_PureSystems.fm

The following expansion nodes are available:

 IBM Flex System Storage Expansion Node, which provides locally-attached disk
expansion to the IBM Flex System x240 Compute Node and IBM Flex System x220
Compute Node. Both SAS and SATA disk are supported
 IBM Flex System PCIe Expansion Node, which allows up to four additional PCI-E adapter
cards to be attached to either the IBM Flex System x240 Compute Node or IBM Flex
System x220 Compute Node.

Figure 4-14 shows the storage and PCIe expansion nodes.

IBM x240 Compute Node

IBM x220 Compute Node IBM Storage Expansion

Node

IBM x240 Compute Node IBM Storage Expansion

Node

Additional (12) HS HDDs or SSDs

RAID 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, 60

Compatibility:
x240 Compute Node
x220 Compute Node

Figure 4-14 Expansion nodes

For more information about expansion nodes, see IBM Flex System PCIe Expansion Node,
TIPS0906 and Flex System Storage Expansion Node, TIPS0914.

4.5.5 I/O modules

Networking in data centers is undergoing a transition from a discrete traditional model to a
more flexible, optimized model. The network architecture in IBM Flex System is designed to
address the key challenges that customers are facing today in their data centers. The key
focus areas of the network architecture on this platform are unified network management,
optimized and automated network virtualization, and simplified network infrastructure.

Ethernet I/O module selections are summarized in Table 4-6.

Table 4-6 Switch module selection

Suitable switch module Switches

EN2092 SI4093 EN4023 EN4093R CN4093 EN6131

1Gb System 10Gb 10Gb 10Gb 40Gb
Ethernet Interconnect Scalable Scalable Converged Ethernet
Switch Module Switch Switch Scalable Switch
Requirement Switch

Gigabit Ethernet to nodes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

10 Gb Ethernet to nodes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Chapter 4. IBM PureSystems overview 89

5250_Ch04_PureSystems.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Suitable switch module Switches

EN2092 SI4093 EN4023 EN4093R CN4093 EN6131

1Gb System 10Gb 10Gb 10Gb 40Gb
Ethernet Interconnect Scalable Scalable Converged Ethernet
Switch Module Switch Switch Scalable Switch
Requirement Switch

40 Gb Ethernet to nodes No No No No No Yes

10 Gb Ethernet uplinks Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

40 Gb Ethernet uplinks No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Basic Layer 2 switching Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Advanced Layer 2 switching: Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes

IEEE features (STP, QoS)

Layer 3 IPv6 switching Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes

(forwarding, routing, and ACL
filtering)

10 Gb Ethernet CEE No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

FCoE FIP Snooping Bridge No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

support

FCF support No No Yes No Yes No

Native FC port support No No No No Yes No

Switch stacking No No No Yes Yes No

802.1Qbg Edge Virtual Bridge No Yes No Yes Yes No

support

vLAG support No No Yes Yes Yes No

UFP support No Yes No Yes Yes No

Virtual Fabric mode vNIC No No No Yes Yes No

support

Switch independent mode vNIC No Yes Yes Yes Yes No

support

SPAR support Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

OpenFlow support No No Yes Yes No No

Brocade VCS support No No Yes No No No

Fibre Channel ISL E_Port No No No No Yes No

support:

Automated ISL Trunking No No Yes No No No

Transparent interconnection of No No Yes No No No

lots of links (TRILL)

Providing innovation, leadership, and choice in the I/O module portfolio uniquely positions the
IBM Flex System to provide meaningful solutions to address customer need.

For more information about Ethernet and converged networking see the following website:

90 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch04_PureSystems.fm

http://www.ibm.com/systems/flex/networking/bto/ethernet.html

4.5.6 Storage (internal and external)

IBM Flex System offers several possibilities for integration into storage infrastructures, such
as Fibre Channel (FC), iSCSI, and Converged Enhanced Ethernet. This selection is important
during storage infrastructure planning for IBM PureSystems setup. Consider storage system
interoperability, I/O modules, performance, high availability and redundancy, backup, and boot
from storage area network (SAN).
 IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node and V7000 Expansion Node are installed internally
with in the IBM Flex System Enterprise chassis.
 IBM Storwize V7000, IBM XIV Storage System series, IBM System Storage DS8000
series, IBM Storwize V3700 Storage System, IBM System Storage DS3500 series, IBM
network-attached storage products, IBM FlashSystem, IBM System Storage TS3500
Library, IBM System Storage TS3310 series, IBM System Storage TS3200 Tape Library,
IBM System Storage TS3100 Tape Library, and IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape
Autoloader can be installed externally with the IBM Flex System chassis.

For more information, see IBM Flex System Products and Technology for Power Systems,
SG24-8256:

http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/abstracts/sg248256.html?Open

For information about the IBM PureFlex System and Flex System solutions, see the following
website:

http://www.ibm.com/systems/pureflex/solutions.html

Chapter 4. IBM PureSystems overview 91

5250_Ch04_PureSystems.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

92 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch05_SpectrumScale.fm

Chapter 5. IBM Spectrum Scale

IBM Spectrum Scale is a proven, scalable, high-performance data and file management
solution (based upon IBM General Parallel File System or GPFS™, also formerly known as
code name Elastic Storage). IBM Spectrum Scale provides world-class storage management
with extreme scalability, flash accelerated performance, and automatic policy-based storage
tiering from flash through disk to tape. IBM Spectrum Scale reduces storage costs up to 90%
while improving security and management efficiency in cloud, big data, and analytics
environments.

This chapter describes IBM Spectrum Scale and the current IBM products that are related to
it:
 IBM Spectrum Storage family
 Overview of IBM Spectrum Scale
 Use cases for IBM Spectrum Scale
 IBM Elastic Storage Server
 IBM Spectrum Scale for Linux on IBM z System

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999, 2015. All rights reserved. 93

5250_Ch05_SpectrumScale.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

5.1 IBM Spectrum Storage family

IBM Spectrum Scale is part of the IBM Spectrum Storage family, which is a software family
that is designed to deliver simplified storage capacity and services with proven advanced
functions and extreme ease of management. For more information, see 1.3, “IBM Spectrum
Storage family” on page 5.

5.2 Overview of IBM Spectrum Scale

IBM Spectrum Scale is a new software defined storage solution from IBM. It is a
high-performance enterprise platform for optimizing data and file management. It simplifies
data management with integrated tools designed to help organizations manage petabytes of
data and billions of files.

IBM Spectrum Scale allows a group of computers concurrent access to a common set of file
data over a storage area network (SAN) infrastructure, a Internet Protocol network, or a mix
of connection types. The computers can run a mix of IBM AIX, Linux, or Microsoft Windows
operating systems.

IBM Spectrum Scale was designed from the beginning to support modern scale out
architectures. Therefore, it is scalable and able to handle the large workloads of analytical
applications, such as Hadoop.

IBM Spectrum Scale can provide a single, global name space for an entire storage
infrastructure, as shown in Figure 5-1.

Compute farm

Client workstations Users and applications

Single Name Space

Site A OpenStack

NFS MapReduce
Posix Cinder Swift
Connector

Site B Active
File
Mgmt
IBM Spectrum Scale
Off Premise

Site C

Flash Disk Tape Storage Rich

Servers

Policies for data management and data migration between tiers

Figure 5-1 Overview of IBM Spectrum Scale

Elastic Storage is based on proven General Parallel File System (GPFS) technology, which
provides highly reliable and efficient use of infrastructure.

94 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch05_SpectrumScale.fm

5.2.1 IBM Spectrum Scale delivery models

There are three basic delivery models for IBM Spectrum Scale:
 Cloud-based delivery model
 Software-based delivery model
 Hardware-based delivery model

These models can be mixed as required to suit the business needs of a customer.

Cloud-based delivery model

The Cloud-based delivery model allows you to use off-premise storage from a cloud vendor,
such as IBM SoftLayer.

Software-based delivery model

The software-based delivery model allows you to use any storage hardware from any vendor
(Bring Your Own Device, BYOD) to implement IBM Spectrum Scale storage. It also allows you
to choose from various common server hardware and operating systems. It allows you to
tailor your environment to meet the business requirements and priorities.

The server hardware and operating systems that are supported include the following
examples:
 Linux on Power
 Linux on z System
 Linux on x86 (64-bit)
 IBM AIX on Power
 Windows on x86 (64-bit)

Hardware-based delivery model

The hardware-based delivery model allows you to purchase a balanced hardware
configuration with preinstalled IBM software.

5.2.2 IBM Spectrum Scale cluster configurations

IBM Spectrum Scale supports many different cluster configurations, including the following
examples:
 SAN cluster
 NSD cluster
 Mixed cluster
 Shared nothing

The configuration can be chosen based on application requirements.

SAN cluster
The SAN cluster or shared disk configuration is the most basic configuration, where the
storage is directly attached to all the systems in the cluster, as shown in Figure 5-2.

Chapter 5. IBM Spectrum Scale 95

5250_Ch05_SpectrumScale.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

TCP/IP network

Application
nodes

Storage network

Storage

Figure 5-2 IBM Spectrum Scale SAN cluster configuration

With a direct connection to storage, each shared block device is available concurrently to all
application nodes in the IBM Spectrum Scale cluster. This configuration is optimal, when the
application nodes require the highest-performance access to the data.

NSD cluster
In environments where the application nodes are not attached to a SAN, IBM Spectrum Scale
uses the Network Shared Disk (NSD) protocol to access disks, as shown in Figure 5-3.

Application
nodes

TCP/IP or Infiniband network

NSD
servers

Storage Storage

Figure 5-3 IBM Spectrum Scale network block I/O configuration

In this configuration, separate NSD servers are used to provide access to the storage. The
NSD servers are usually defined in redundant pairs to enhance availability and to enable
concurrent maintenance. From the application node, the file system looks the same as with
the shared disk model.

Mixed cluster
In some cases, the requirements of different application nodes can be different. In that case, it
is possible to create a configuration where some application nodes have direct access to the
shared disks and some nodes access them through the network, as shown in Figure 5-4.

96 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch05_SpectrumScale.fm

Application
nodes

TCP/IP or InfiniBand network

NSD Application
servers nodes

Storage network

Storage

Figure 5-4 IBM Spectrum Scale mixed-cluster configuration

Shared nothing
In a shared nothing cluster, each application server (or storage rich server) owns its data
disks. IBM Spectrum Scale implements a single name space over all the disks, and the File
Placement Optimizer component takes care of storing the data into the place where it is
needed. The configuration is shown in Figure 5-5.

TCP/IP or Infiniband network

Application
nodes

Storage

Figure 5-5 IBM Spectrum Scale shared nothing configuration

The benefit of the shared nothing cluster is that it offers unlimited scalability with no
bottlenecks because each application node has full control of its own storage.

5.2.3 Sharing data between IBM Spectrum Scale clusters

There are two methods available to share data across IBM Spectrum Scale clusters:
 Multicluster
 Active File Manager

Both methods allow the creation of a global namespace within a data center, across campus,
or even between data centers that are located around the world. The preferred method

Chapter 5. IBM Spectrum Scale 97

5250_Ch05_SpectrumScale.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

depends on whether a reliable, high-speed network connection is available between the IBM
Spectrum Scale clusters.

Multicluster
With the Multicluster feature, a member of one IBM Spectrum Scale cluster can mount file
systems from another IBM Spectrum Scale cluster. This feature is designed to allow file
sharing with higher performance levels than file-sharing technologies such as NFS or
Common Internet File System (CIFS).

The benefit of using Multicluster is that the data is only stored in one place. Data transfer uses
the NSD protocol, which provides the same performance as if the data is in the local cluster.
However, the Multicluster configuration requires a reliable connection between the IBM
Spectrum Scale clusters, and is not the preferred choice when the access needs to span
less-reliable WAN links.

Active File Manager

Active File Manager (AFM) is a technology that allows file sets to be copied between IBM
Spectrum Scale systems. The copies are kept consistent by IBM Spectrum Scale. This
method is useful especially when there are slow or less-reliable WAN links between the IBM
Spectrum Scale systems.

5.2.4 Accessing data in IBM Spectrum Scale

There are many applications, that can access data in IBM Spectrum Scale, including the
following examples:
 High-performance analytics (low-latency parallel)
 Hadoop and big data
 High-performance computing (batch, serial, Message Passing Interface (MPI), workflow)
 Application frameworks (long-running services)

See Figure 5-6 for an overview of accessing data in IBM Spectrum Scale.

Job Scheduler, App, or User

Elastic Storage Global Namespace

Storage Storage Storage

Figure 5-6 Accessing data in IBM Spectrum Scale

5.2.5 Advanced features of IBM Spectrum Scale

IBM Spectrum Scale provides many advanced features, which are important for specific
workloads. Some of these features include:
 Native encryption

98 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch05_SpectrumScale.fm

IBM Spectrum Scale encryption is designed to protect data on a disk from most security
breaches, unauthorized access, or being lost, stolen, or improperly discarded. IBM
Spectrum Scale uses cryptographic erase intended for fast, simple, and secure disk drive
retirement. The encryption is compliant with the publication NIST SP 800-131A,
“Recommended Security Controls for Federal Information Systems and Organizations”.
 SSD read-only cache
The support of large local read-only cache by using solid-state disks benefits many
applications. Data is available with very low latency, and the cache serves to reduce the
load on the shared network and on the back-end disk storage, optimizing performance.
 File Placement Optimizer
File Placement Optimizer (FPO) provides a locality-aware placement of data in IBM
Spectrum Scale. It includes fine-grained directory locking for directory operations that
supports Hadoop and big data workloads that require many directories to be created,
deleted, or moved from under the same parent directory for each map and reduce
operation.

5.3 Use cases for IBM Spectrum Scale

IBM Spectrum Scale provides flexible and scalable support for many applications. For
examples, see Table 5-1.

Table 5-1 IBM Spectrum Scale use cases

Use case Primary need Typical cluster Benefits
models

Fast file and object Tech computing with SAN cluster,  Fast file system
high performance NSD cluster  Virtually unlimited
scalability

Economy file and Lower cost with NSD cluster  Supports low-cost
object acceptable lower commodity storage
performance  Supports
lowest-cost
storage tier (tape)
 Integrated
Offerings that use
JBODs
 GPFS native RAID
for fast disk rebuild
time

Secure file and object Higher security NSD cluster,  Native file
SAN cluster, encryption for
Shared nothing data-at-rest
 Secure file erase

Global file and object Shared data across Multi cluster network  Enables multi-site
sites shared disk with WAN collaboration over
WANs
 Multiple caching
options with Active
File Management

Chapter 5. IBM Spectrum Scale 99

5250_Ch05_SpectrumScale.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Use case Primary need Typical cluster Benefits

models

Analytics Derive insights from Shared nothing  Run analytics on

data one data set
without copying
data
 Support for rapid
Hadoop TeraSort
operations

Archive only Long-term retention of NSD cluster,  Virtually unlimited

data SAN cluster, scale out
Shared nothing  Tape integration

Backup only Recover data after loss NSD cluster,  Scale out
event, for example, SAN cluster,  Snapshots
data deletion or data Shared nothing  Tape integration
corruption  Tivoli Storage
Manager
integration

Disaster recovery Run a set of policies NSD cluster,  Ensures the

and procedures to SAN cluster, survivability of data
re-create vital data in Shared nothing in the event of
the wake of a disaster failures
 Asynchronous
data updates
accommodate
unreliable WAN
connections
 Supports customer
defined Recovery
Point Objectives

In any use case, the multiprotocol support of IBM Spectrum Scale allows you to access the
storage with file-based, object-based protocols, or both, as required by the application.

5.4 IBM Elastic Storage Server

The IBM Elastic Storage Server is an integrated offering that delivers balanced and highly
scalable IBM Spectrum Scale building blocks to meet the capacity and performance
requirements of the applications.

5.4.1 IBM Elastic Storage Server hardware features

The IBM Elastic Storage Server is a clustered system, built to have no system-wide single
points of failure. It also supports concurrent firmware updates.

Each IBM Elastic Storage server includes the following standard features:
 Two Power S88L server nodes (8247-22L) with 2 x 10 Core 3.4 GHz IBM POWER8™
processors
 One to six disk drawers, depending on the model:
– EXP24S storage drawers (8247-22L FC #EL1S)
– DCS3700 storage expansion drawers (1818-80E)

100 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch05_SpectrumScale.fm

 Disk drive modules, depending on the configuration

The IBM Elastic Storage Server can be ordered with a rack, or installed in a
customer-provided rack. The benefit of ordering a rack together with the IBM Elastic Storage
Server is that all the components are integrated with the rack in the factory.

The IBM Elastic Storage Server can be connected to the clients with either Ethernet or
InfiniBand interfaces, depending on the required I/O bandwidth and latency. Up to three
network interfaces can be installed to each node. The network interfaces available include the
following interfaces:
 EL27 10G Travis EN RoCE (without Optics)
 EL2Z 10G Travis EN RoCE (Optics)
 EC3A 40G Travis 3 EN RoCE Adapter
 EL3D PCIe3 LP 2-PORT 56 Gb FDR IB PCIe x16

In addition, the following are required for managing one or more IBM Elastic Storage Servers:
 Management server (8247-21L)
Required on initial system order. Optional for upgrades.
 Hardware Management Console (HMC) (7042-CR8)
Required for system operation. Can be provided by the customer.
 Flat Panel Display (7316-TF4)

These components can be used to manage an environment that contains up to 24 IBM

Elastic Storage Server building blocks.

Seven models of the IBM Elastic Storage Server are available. Some models can have
different disk drive module (DDM) sizes, giving a total of 16 possible configurations. The
configurations are shown in Table 5-2.

Table 5-2 IBM Elastic Storage Server configurations

Model Server memory Disk drawers DDMs

5146-GS1 128 GB 1 x EXP24S 24 x HDD 1.2 TB

24 x SSD 400 GB

24 x SSD 800 GB

5146-GS2 128 GB 2 x EXP24S 48 x HDD 1.2 TB

48 x SSD 400 GB

48 x SSD 800 GB

5146-GS4 256 GB 4 x EXP24S 96 x HDD 1.2 TB

96 x SSD 400 GB

96 x SSD 800 GB

5146-GS6 256 GB 6 x EXP24S 144 x HDD 1.2 TB

5146-GL2 128 GB 2 x DCS3700 116 x HDD 2 TB

116 x HDD 4 TB

Chapter 5. IBM Spectrum Scale 101

5250_Ch05_SpectrumScale.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Model Server memory Disk drawers DDMs

5146-GL4 256 GB 4 x DCS3700 232 x HDD 2 TB

232 x HDD 4 TB

5146-GL6 256 GB 6 x DCS3700 348 x HDD 2 TB

348 x HDD 4 TB

5.4.2 IBM Elastic Storage Server software features

The IBM Elastic Storage Server is based on the following software:
 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 for Power
 GPFS Standard Edition 4.1
 GPFS Native RAID 4.1
 IBM Support for xCAT 2

5.5 IBM Spectrum Scale for Linux on IBM z System

The IBM Spectrum Scale for Linux on IBM z System implements the IBM Spectrum Scale
Software-based delivery model in the Linux on IBM z System environment. The highlights of
IBM Spectrum Scale for Linux on IBM z System include the following features
 Supports both extended count key data (IBM ECKD™) DASD disks and Fibre Channel
Protocol attached SCSI disks
 Supports IBM HiperSockets™ for communication within one z System

The operating systems that are supported by the IBM Spectrum Scale for Linux on IBM z
System are listed in Table 5-3.

Table 5-3 Supported Linux distributions

Distribution Minimum level Kernel

SUSE Enterprise Server 11 SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 11 SP3 + 3.0.101-0.15-default

Maintweb Update or later maintenance
update or Service Pack

Red Hat Enterprise Linux Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.5 + Errata 2.6.32-431.11.2.el6
Server 6 Update RHSA-2014-0328, or later minor
update

Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 3.10.0-123.6.3.el7.s390x

For more information about IBM Spectrum Scale for Linux on IBM z System, look at the IBM
Redbooks Solution Guide Understanding IBM Spectrum Scale for Linux on z Systems
(Express Edition), TIPS1211.

5.6 More information

The following IBM Redbooks publications contain information that is relevant to IBM
Spectrum Scale:

102 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch05_SpectrumScale.fm

 IBM Private, Public, and Hybrid Cloud Storage Solutions, REDP-4873

 A Deployment Guide for Elastic Storage Object, REDP-5113
 Building Big Data and Analytics Solutions in the Cloud, REDP-5085
 IBM Spectrum Scale (formerly GPFS), SG24-8254

For more information, see the IBM Spectrum Scale product website at:

http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/spectrum/scale/index.html

The “An introduction to IBM Spectrum Scale” IBM white paper is available at the following
website:

http://public.dhe.ibm.com/common/ssi/ecm/en/dcw03057usen/DCW03057USEN.PDF

Chapter 5. IBM Spectrum Scale 103

5250_Ch05_SpectrumScale.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

104 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250p02.fm

Part 2

Part 2 Disk systems

Part 2 describes disk products that can either be directly attached to a server by direct
attached-storage (DAS), used in a storage area network (SAN) infrastructure, or used with
network-attached storage (NAS).

The IBM System Storage disk products portfolio covers the needs of a wide spectrum of
possible implementations, from entry-level and midrange to large enterprise.

The family is further complemented by a range of expansion enclosures to expand the disk
storage capacities of individual systems into hundreds of terabytes (TB), or even to a
petabyte (PB).

Furthermore, a full range of IBM System Storage capabilities such as advanced copy
services, management tools, and virtualization services are available to help protect data.

This part contains the following information:

 Chapter 6, “Entry-level disk storage” on page 107
 Chapter 7, “Midrange disk systems” on page 119
 Chapter 8, “Enterprise disk systems” on page 161
 Chapter 9, “IBM FlashSystem storage” on page 273
 Chapter 10, “IBM Scale Out Network Attached Storage (SONAS)” on page 283
 Chapter 11, “IBM System Storage N series expansion units” on page 287

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999, 2015. All rights reserved. 105

5250p02.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

106 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch06_Entry_Disk.fm

Chapter 6. Entry-level disk storage

This chapter describes the entry-level family of external storage enclosures. The models are
entry-level, cost-effective workgroup storage servers, and are flexible for use with the IBM
System x, IBM POWER®, and IBM BladeCenter servers, and for selected third-party
products.

The newest member in the entry storage family, the IBM Storwize V3700, brings some of the
features of the midrange storage products into the entry range, at a very affordable price. The
EXP2500 provides storage expansion for selected IBM System x and BladeCenter servers.
All of them perform in the next-generation 6 Gbps SAS.

Storwize V3700 Storage System is a member of the Storwize family of disk systems. Using
IBM Storwize V7000 Storage System and IBM SAN Volume Controller functions,
interoperability, and management tools, Storwize V3700 delivers innovation and new levels of
storage efficiency with ease of use in an entry disk system to enable you to overcome storage
challenges.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999, 2015. All rights reserved. 107

5250_Ch06_Entry_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

6.1 Overview of entry-level series models

Designed to deliver advanced functions at a breakthrough price, these entry-level systems
provide an exceptional solution for workgroup storage applications such as email, file, print
and web servers, in addition to collaborative databases and remote boot for diskless servers.

6.1.1 IBM Storwize V3700

Based on the innovative architecture design of Storwize V7000, the new Storwize V3700
system provides a powerful, affordable, and efficient storage system, which is designed to
address growing customer data requirements and infrastructure consolidation needs.

The modular and scalable design of the V3700 provides the flexibility to upgrade your storage
with additional disk enclosures as your data needs grow. It also has non-disruptive migration
integrated in the system, which allows you to have near continuous availability.

An extensive set of advanced software features is included:

 Built-in management capabilities with an easy-to-use, embedded graphical user interface
that is based on the Storwize V7000 interface design
 Internal virtualization and thin provisioning at no extra cost, allowing you to allocate the
exact amount of space that is needed when it is required
 Sophisticated data protection with FlashCopy technology included (up to 64 targets)

IBM Storwize V3700 provides high flexibility of host attachment options, which provide the
ability to connect to your iSCSI, Fibre Channel, SAS, and FCoE environments.

6.1.2 IBM System Storage EXP2500 Express

The EXP2500 Express is a cost-effective, fully integrated complement to System x and
BladeCenter servers. Offering substantial improvements at a price that will fit most budgets,
the EXP2500 Express delivers superior price-to-performance ratios, functions, scalability, and
ease of use for the entry-level storage user.

IBM System Storage EXP2500 Express is designed to work as a direct-attached external disk
storage solution for IBM System x and IBM BladeCenter servers that uses ServeRAID
controllers.

EXP2500 Express highlights are as follows:

 Easy installation and management with storage expansion technology designed for IBM
System x and IBM BladeCenter attachment
 Next-generation 6 Gbps Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) host and drive interfaces, which
enable infrastructure simplification
 Support for flexible high-performance, SSD, and nearline disk drive options
 High capacity, with support for multiple enclosures per configuration
 High-density 2U enclosure is designed to support up to 12 3.5" disk drives on model
EXP2512 Express and 24 2.5" disk drives on model EXP2524 Express
 High availability and reliability, with dual ac power supplies and fans

For more information, see 6.3, “IBM System Storage EXP2500 Express” on page 114.

108 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch06_Entry_Disk.fm

6.2 IBM Storwize V3700

IBM Storwize V3700 is a powerful, easy to use, self-optimizing, and affordable Storwize
system, bringing Storwize V7000 value to entry customers.

IBM Storwize V3700 supports up to two redundant RAID controllers with either twelve or
twenty-four drive configurations. There are two types of expansion enclosures, each with
either twelve or twenty-four drives. IBM Storwize V3700 can scale up to a maximum of ten
enclosures with up to 240 drives, depending on the configuration. Built on the proven
Storwize V7000 technology, IBM Storwize V3700 provides the following features:
 Great consolidation flexibility through support for the following host attachment protocols:
iSCSI, Fibre Channel, FCoE, and SAS
 The same management interface as Storwize V7000 providing familiar experience
 Advanced virtualization features previously only found in midrange systems such as IBM
Storwize V7000
 Sophisticated data protection that uses FlashCopy technology with optional upgrades
 6 Gbps SAS drive attachment technology
 Multiple internal drive options: Flash drives, 15k r SAS, 10k r SAS and Nearline SAS

Figure 6-1 shows the 12-slot model.

Figure 6-1 IBM Storwize V3700 12-slot control or expansion enclosure

Figure 6-2 shows the 24-slot model.

Figure 6-2 IBM Storwize V3700 24-slot control or expansion enclosure

Table 6-1 lists the IBM Storwize V3700 specifications.

Chapter 6. Entry-level disk storage 109

5250_Ch06_Entry_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Table 6-1 IBM Storwize V3700 specifications

Component Description

Model 2072-12C - V3700 Control Enclosure 12 x 3.5” drives

2072-24C - V3700 Control Enclosure 24 x 2.5” drives
2072-12E - V3700 Expansion Enclosure 12 x 3.5” drives
2072-24E - V3700 Expansion Enclosure 24 x 2.5” drives
2072-2DC- V3700 SFF DC Dual Control Enclosure
2072-2DE- V3700 SFF DC Dual Expansion Enclosure

RAID controller Dual active, hot-swappable controllers

Cache per controller 4 GB cache per controller with 8 GB upgrade (battery-backed)

Host interface Six 6 Gb SAS and four 1 Gb Ethernet ports standard for SAS and iSCSI
connectivity. In addition to that, four options (per one node canister):
 Four 8 Gbps Fibre Channel ports
 Four 1 Gbps iSCSI ports
 Two 10 Gbps iSCSI ports
 Four 6 Gbps SAS ports

Supported drives 6 Gbps SAS 3.5-inch drives:

 2 TB, 3 TB, 4 TB, and 6 TB 7,200 r Nearline

6 Gbps SAS 2.5-inch drives:

 146 GB 15k r
 300 GB 15k r
 600 GB 15k r
 600 GB 10k r
 900 GB 10k r
 1 TB 7.2k r Nearline
 1.2 TB 10k r
 1.8TB 10k r

2.5-inch Flash drives:

 200 GB, 400 GB, and 800 GB

RAID RAID 0, 1, 5, 6, 10

Maximum drives Up to 240 drives (High-performance, enterprise class disk drives,

supported High-capacity, archival-class nearline disk drives, and Flash drives)

Fans and power Fully redundant, hot-swappable

supplies

Rack support Standard 19-inch rack-mount enclosure

Warranty 3-year limited warranty, Customer-replaceable units, On-site service,

Next-business-day 9x5, Service upgrades available

For the latest specification information about the IBM Storwize V3700, see this website:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/disk/storwize_v3700/index.html

6.2.1 IBM Storwize V3700 components

IBM Storwize V3700 is a 2U rack mountable enclosure with up to two node or expansion
canisters, twelve or twenty-four drives, and two power supplies that contain fans.

Node canisters contain 4 GB of cache, which can be upgraded to 8 GB providing up to 16 GB

of cache for the system. Each node canister contains a battery to provide cache backup in
case of power failure. There are also 6 Gbps SAS ports for expansion connectivity. Node

110 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch06_Entry_Disk.fm

canisters can be upgraded with host interface cards (HIC) to accommodate your host
environment:
 4-port 8 Gbps Fibre Channel HIC
 4-port 1 Gbps iSCSI HIC
 4-port 6 GB SAS HIC
 2-port 10 Gbps iSCSI/FCoE HIC

Attachment: IBM Storwize V3700 allows directly attached Fibre Channel hosts.
A maximum of 4 redundant Fibre Channel hosts can be directly attached.

An expansion canister houses two 6 Gbps SAS ports that are used for connection to the
control enclosure and additional expansions.

IBM Storwize V3700 uses new mini SAS HD connectors to connect the expansions to the
control enclosure. Figure 6-3 shows the difference between mini SAS cables, which are used
by IBM Storwize V7000; and mini SAS HD cables, which are used by IBM Storwize V3700.

Mini SAS

Mini SAS HD

Figure 6-3 Comparison of mini SAS and mini SAS HD

IBM Storwize V3700 has a single expansion SAS chain that supports up to nine expansion
enclosures. Node canisters use SAS port 4 for the expansion connection.

Figure 6-4 on page 112 shows the IBM Storwize V3700 expansion cabling topology.

Chapter 6. Entry-level disk storage 111

5250_Ch06_Entry_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Figure 6-4 IBM Storwize V3700 expansion cabling topology

Most of the V3700 components are Customer Replaceable Units (CRUs), except for the
enclosure midplane:
 Power supplies (with fans)
 Node and expansion canisters
 Battery Backup Unit (BBU)
 Cache memory
 Host Interface Card (HIC)
 All disk drives

6.2.2 IBM Storwize V3700 software and configuration

IBM Storwize V3700 software is based on the SVC/V7000 software stack. However, unlike
SAN Volume Controller and V7000, V3700 software is distributed as Licensed Machine Code,
which means that users do not have to purchase and install a separate license to use the
system.

The following functions are included with every Storwize V3700 system:

112 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch06_Entry_Disk.fm

RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 6, and 10 provide the flexibility to choose the level of data protection
required.

Virtualization of internal storage enables rapid, flexible provisioning and simple configuration
changes.

Thin provisioning optimizes efficiency by allocating disk storage space in a flexible manner
among multiple users, based on the minimum space that is required by each user at any time.
With thin provisioning, applications use only the space they need, not the total space that is
allocated to them.

Data migration enables easy and nondisruptive moves of volumes from another storage
system onto the Storwize V3700 system with FC or SAS connectivity. You can easily migrate
data from DS3200/DS3500 to Storwize V3700. For more information, see “Migrating” in the
IBM Knowledge Center:

http://www.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/STLM5A_7.4.0/com.ibm.storwize.v3700.740
.doc/svc_icmigrating_42ki9p.html?lang=en

FlashCopy allows you to create copies of data for backup, parallel processing, testing, and
development, and have the copies available almost immediately. Storwize V3700 supports up
to 64 FlashCopy targets per system.

Several licensed functions have 90-day trial licenses available. You can use the trial licenses
to determine whether the function works as expected, create a business justification for
licensed function, or test the benefit in your actual environment. If you use a trial license, the
system warns you when the trial is about to expire at regular intervals. If a license is not
purchased and activated before the trial period expires, the system automatically suspends
any configuration that is associated with the function.

The following extra licenses can be purchased to expand the capabilities of your system.:

Easy Tier
The Easy Tier responds to pools that have a mixture of flash, enterprise, and nearline storage
in any combination. The system automatically and nondisruptively moves data between the
MDisks to optimize performance. For example, Easy Tier moves frequently accessed data
from enterprise or nearline MDisks to flash drive MDisks, thus placing such data in a faster
tier of storage. A 90-day trial version of this function is available.

Remote copy
The remote copy function enables you to set up a relationship between two volumes, so that
updates that are made by an application to one volume are mirrored on the other volume. The
volumes can be in the same system or on two different systems. The license settings apply
only to the system on which you are configuring license settings. For remote copy
partnerships, a license is also required on any remote systems that are in the partnership. A
90-day trial version of this function is available.

FlashCopy upgrade
The FlashCopy upgrade extends the base FlashCopy function that is included with the
product. The base version of FlashCopy limits the system to 64 target volumes. With the
FlashCopy upgrade license activated on the system, an unlimited number of FlashCopy
mappings are allowed. If you reach the limit that is imposed by the base function before you
activate the upgrade license, you cannot create any more FlashCopy mappings.

Chapter 6. Entry-level disk storage 113

5250_Ch06_Entry_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Turbo Performance
Turbo Performance function provides enhanced performance for the system. A 90-day trial
version of this function is available.

An IBM Storwize family system is in one of two layers: the replication layer or the storage
layer. The system layer affects how the system interacts with SAN Volume Controller and
external Storwize family systems. SVC can be only in the replication layer. IBM Storwize
V3700 and V7000 can be in the storage layer, which means that they can be put behind
another SAN Volume Controller, V3700 and V7000. Also, they can be in the replication layer,
which means that they can virtualize another V3700 and V7000, which are used as the
storage layer. It provides the opportunity for flexible organization and virtualization
configurations.

Attention: Only Image mode disks can be virtualized by IBM Storwize V3700.

The IBM Storwize V3700 uses basic storage units called managed disks and collects them
into one or more storage pools. These storage pools then provide the physical capacity to
create volumes for use by hosts.

In the initial configuration, all the capacity is automatically configured by using the following
guidelines:
 Solid-state drives are configured as a RAID 1 array with two members and one spare
drive.
 SAS drives are configured as a RAID 5 array with eight members and one spare drive.
 Nearline SAS drives are configured as a RAID 6 array with 12 members and one spare
drive.

Storwize V3700 supports hot-spare drives. Spare drives are global spares, meaning that any
spare, which is as least as large as the drive that is being replaced, can be used in an array.
The spare system prefers the best possible match based on the following factors: technology
(SAS, SSD, or Nearline SAS), speed, capacity, and location.

Installation of the IBM Storwize V3700 is similar to the installation of V7000 with some
improvements:
 Usability improvements to the Init Tool
 A two-page quick installation poster

Poster quickly describes how to physically assemble the system and place it into a rack. The
installation wizard helps the user to walk through the initial installation tasks:
 System setup
 Expansion enclosure detection
 Call home and notification setup
 Host creation

6.3 IBM System Storage EXP2500 Express

The IBM System Storage EXP2500 Express storage enclosures enable flexible, low-cost
storage capacity expansion of IBM System x and BladeCenter servers via ServeRAID
controllers to address growing storage needs. It is available in two models, EXP2512
(1747-HC1) and EXP2524 (1747-HC2).

114 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch06_Entry_Disk.fm

Figure 6-5 on page 115 shows the IBM System Storage EXP2512 Express storage enclosure
front view.

Figure 6-5 IBM System Storage EXP2512 Express storage enclosure front view

Figure 6-6 shows IBM System Storage EXP2524 Express storage enclosure front view.

Figure 6-6 IBM System Storage EXP2524 Express storage enclosure front view

The EXP2512 Express has twelve 3.5-inch SAS drive bays, and the EXP2524 Express has
twenty-four 2.5-inch (small form factor) SAS drive bays. Both models support dual-port,
6 Gbps SAS high-performance and high-capacity nearline drives. EXP2524 additionally
supports dual-port, 3 Gbps SAS 2.5-inch solid-state drives (SSD). Disk drives of the same
form factor can be intermixed within the appropriate enclosure, and EXP2512 and EXP2524
enclosures can be intermixed in a daisy-chain configuration. RAID technology and other
advanced functions are provided through the ServeRAID M5025, M5120, or MR10ie
controllers.

The EXP2500 has the following main features:

 12 (3.5 inch) or 24 (2.5-inch) SAS drive bays in a compact 2U, 19-inch rack mount
enclosure
 Dual port, hot-swappable 6 Gbps SAS high-performance, and high-capacity nearline disk
drive options
 Dual port, hot-swappable 3 Gbps SAS solid-state drive options
 Enterprise-grade RAID technology and other advanced functions that are provided by IBM
ServeRAID M5025, M5120, or MR10ie controllers.
 Daisy-chain connection of multiple EXP2500 enclosures from a single ServeRAID M5025
or M5120 controller port
 Three-year warranty with customer replaceable units (CRU) and onsite service, along with
optional warranty service upgrades

Chapter 6. Entry-level disk storage 115

5250_Ch06_Entry_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Specifications: Table 6-2 lists the EXP2500 specifications.

Table 6-2 IBM System Storage EXP2500 specifications

Component Description

Model 1747-HC1 (P/N 174712X) - EXP2512 IBM Express Storage™ Enclosure

1747-HC2 (P/N 174724X) - EXP2524 Express Storage Enclosure

RAID controller EXP2500 Express supports:

Direct attachment to selected System x servers with:
 IBM ServeRAID M5025 SAS/SATA Controller (part number 46M0830)
 IBM ServeRAID M5120 SAS/SATA Controller (P/N 81Y4478)
Direct attachment to select BladeCenter servers with:
 BladeCenter SAS Connectivity Module (part number 39Y9195)
 IBM ServeRAID MR10ie (CIOv) Controller (part number 46C7167)

Supported drives EXP2512:

300 GB 15,000 r 6 Gb SAS 3.5-inch HDD
450 GB 15,000 r 6 Gb SAS 3.5-inch HDD
600 GB 15,000 r 6 Gb SAS 3.5-inch HDD
1 TB 7,200 r 6 Gb SAS NL 3.5-inch HDD
2 TB 7,200 r 6 Gb SAS NL 3.5-inch HDD
3 TB 7,200 r 6 Gb SAS NL 3.5-inch HDD
4 TB 7,200 r 6 Gb SAS NL 3.5-inch HDD
(The 3 TB and 4 TB drives cannot be used in an EXP2512 enclosure that
is connected to BladeCenter servers.)

EXP2524:
146 GB 15,000 r 6 Gb SAS 2.5-inch HDD
300 GB 15,000 r 6 Gb SAS 2.5-inch HDD
600 GB 10,000 r 6 Gb SAS 2.5-inch HDD
900 GB 10,000 r 6 Gb SAS 2.5-inch HDD
1.2 TB 10,000 r 6 Gb SAS 2.5-inch HDD
1 TB 7,200 r 6 Gb SAS NL 2.5-inch HDD
200 GB 2.5-inch SAS Solid State Drive (SSD)
400 GB 2.5-inch SAS Solid State Drive (SSD)

RAID levels Supports RAID levels that are supported by ServeRAID Controllers:
Standard 0, 1, 10, 5, 50
Optional 6, 60

Fans and power Two hot-swappable 515 watt (115 - 230 V ac) power supplies
supplies

Rack support 19-inch, industry-standard rack, 2U

Warranty Three-year limited warranty, customer-replaceable units, onsite service,

next business day 9x5, service upgrades available

116 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch06_Entry_Disk.fm

Each EXP3500 has two upstream and one downstream 6 Gbps SAS ports in addition to one
10/100 Mbps Ethernet port for enclosure management.

Cables are required if the EXP2500 will be managed out-of-band with the 1 Gb Ethernet
management port.

EXP2500 and EXP3000:

 EXP2500 and EXP3000 Expansion Unit enclosures cannot be intermixed in a
daisy-chain connection to a single RAID controller port.
 EXP2500 is not supported for attachment to IBM System Storage DS3000 Storage
Controllers or IBM System Storage DS3500 Express Storage Systems.

For the latest information, including the EXP2500 dimensions, see this website:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/disk/exp2500

6.4 More information

For more information about the IBM entry-level disk systems, see the following Redbooks
publications and websites:
 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700, SG24-8107
 Product information for entry-level disk systems:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/disk/

Chapter 6. Entry-level disk storage 117

5250_Ch06_Entry_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

118 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm

Chapter 7. Midrange disk systems

In the era of cloud, big data and analytics, and mobile and social computing, organizations
need to meet ever-changing demands for storage, while also improving data economics. IT
must deliver more services faster and more efficiently, enable real-time insight and support
more customer interaction. The right infrastructure allows clients to share information, secure
transactions and drive real-time insights.

IBM midrange disk systems, provides all resources that are needed to attend the actual
demand of storage solutions

This chapter presents the features and major characteristics of the various models that make
up the current IBM Midrange disk systems family:
 IBM Storwize V5000 system
 IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node
 IBM Storwize V7000 system
 IBM DCS3700

Technical descriptions and specifications are given for each model in the corresponding
sections.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999, 2015. All rights reserved. 119

5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

7.1 IBM Storwize V5000

IBM Storwize V5000 is a highly flexible, easy to use, virtualized storage system that enables
midsized organizations to meet the challenges of rapid data growth and limited IT budgets. As
an intermediate Storwize family offering, Storwize V5000 enables organizations to
consolidate and provide new capabilities to their existing infrastructures. With flexible
licensing options, Storwize V5000 makes it easy to deploy complementary solutions, such as
IBM ProtecTIER.

The IBM Storwize V5000 solution provides a modular storage system that includes the
capability to virtualize its own internal storage and external SAN-attached storage. The IBM
Storwize V5000 system is a virtualizing Redundant Array of Independent Disk (RAID) entry
and midrange storage system.

IBM Storwize V5000 provides the following benefits:

 Brings enterprise technology to entry and midrange storage
 Speciality administrators are not required
 Easy client setup and service
 Ability to grow the system incrementally as storage capacity and performance needs
change
 Simple integration into the server environment

IBM Storwize V5000 addresses the block storage requirements of small and midsize
organizations and consists of one 2U control enclosure and, optionally, up to six 2U
expansion enclosures, which are connected via serial-attached Small Computer Systems
Interface (SCSI SAS) cables that make up one system that is called an I/O group.

Two I/O groups can be connected to form a cluster.

The control and expansion enclosures are available in the following form factors and can be
intermixed within an I/O group:
 12 x 3.5-inch drives in a 2U unit
 24 x 2.5-inch drives in a 2U unit

Within each enclosure, there are two canisters. Control enclosures contain two node
canisters, and expansion enclosures contain two expansion canisters.

The IBM Storwize V5000 supports up to 168 x 3.5 inch or 336 x 2.5-inch or a combination of
both drive form factors for the internal storage in a two I/O group cluster.

SAS, NL-SAS and solid-state drives (SSDs) types are supported.

The IBM Storwize V5000 is designed to accommodate the most common storage network
technologies to enable easy implementation and management. It can be attached to hosts via
a SAN fabric, an iSCSI infrastructure, or via SAS. Hosts can be SAN or Direct attached.

Important: IBM Storwize V5000 can be direct-attached to a host. For more information
about restrictions, see the IBM System Storage Interoperation Center (SSIC), which is
available at this website:

http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/storage/ssic/interoperability.wss

The IBM Storwize V5000 is a virtualized storage solution that groups its internal drives into
RAID arrays (called Managed Disks or MDisks). MDisks can also be created by importing
LUNs from external FC SAN-attached storage. These MDisks are then grouped into storage

120 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm

pools. Volumes are created from these storage pools and provisioned out to hosts. Storage
pools are normally created with MDisks of the same type and capacity of drive. Volumes can
be moved non-disruptively between storage pools with differing performance characteristics.
For example, a volume can be moved between a storage pool that is made up of NL-SAS
drives to a storage pool made up of SAS drives.

The IBM Storwize V5000 system also provides several configuration options that are aimed at
simplifying the implementation process. It also provides configuration presets and automated
wizards called Directed Maintenance Procedures (DMP) to help resolve events that might
occur. Included with an IBM Storwize V5000 system is a simple and easy-to-use graphical
user interface (GUI) that is designed to allow storage to be deployed quickly and efficiently.
The GUI runs on any supported browser. The management GUI contains a series of
preestablished configuration options that are called presets that use commonly used settings
to quickly configure objects on the system. Presets are available for creating volumes and
IBM FlashCopy mappings and for setting up a RAID configuration.

You can also use the command-line interface (CLI) to set up or control the system.

7.1.1 IBM Storwize V5000 models

The IBM Storwize V5000 platform consists of a number of different models.

For more information about the features, benefits, and specifications of

IBM Storwize V5000 models, see this website:

http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/disk/storwize_v5000/index.html

The IBM Storwize V5000 models are described in Table 6-1. All models have two node
canisters. C models are control enclosures and E models are expansion enclosures.

Table 7-1 IBM Storwize V5000 models

Model Cache Drive slots

One-Year Warranty

2077-12C 16 GB 12 x 3.5-inch

2077-24C 16 GB 24 x 2.5-inch

2077-12E N/A 12 x 3.5-INCH

2077-24E N/A 24 x 2.5-inch

Three-Year Warranty

2078-12C 16 GB 12 x 3-inch

2078-24C 16 GB 24 x 2.5-inch

2078-12E N/A 12 x 3.5-inch

2078-24E N/A 24 x 2.5-inch

Chapter 7. Midrange disk systems 121

5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Figure 7-1 shows the front view of the 2077/2078-12C and 12E enclosures.

Figure 7-1 IBM Storwize V5000 front view of the 2077/2078-12C and 12E enclosures

The drives are positioned in four columns of three horizontal-mounted drive assemblies. The
drive slots are numbered 1 - 12, starting at upper left and going left to right, top to bottom

Figure 7-2 shows the IBM Storwize V5000 front view of the 2077/2078-24C and 24E
enclosures.

Figure 7-2 IBM Storwize V5000 front view of the 2077/2078-24C and 24E enclosures

The drives are positioned in one row of 24 vertically mounted drive assemblies. The drive
slots are numbered 1 - 24, starting from the left. There is a vertical center drive bay molding
between slots 12 and 13.

Figure 6-3 shows the V5000 rear view of the 2077/2078-12C and 24C controllers.

Figure 7-3 IBM Storwize V5000 rear view of the 2077/2078-12C and 24C controllers

Figure 6-3 shows two power supply slots at the bottom of the enclosure. The power supplies
are identical and exchangeable. There are two canister slots at the top of the chassis.

Figure 7-4 shows rear view of the12E and 24E expansion enclosures for the IBM Storwize
V5000.

122 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm

Figure 7-4 IBM Storwize V5000 rear view of the 12E and 24E expansion enclosure

You can see that the only difference between the node enclosure and the expansion
enclosure is the canisters. The canisters of the expansion have only the two SAS ports.

7.1.2 Control enclosure

Each IBM Storwize V5000 system has one control enclosure that contains two node
canisters, disk drives, and two power supplies.

Figure 7-5 shows a Storwize V5000 single node canister.

Figure 7-5 Storwize V5000 single node canister

Each node canister contains the following hardware:

 Battery
 Memory: 8 GB memory
 8 Gb Fibre Channel Host interface card
 Four 6 Gbps SAS ports
 Two 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports
 Two USB 2.0 ports (one port is used during installation)
 System flash

The battery is used in case of power loss. The IBM Storwize V5000 system uses this battery
to power the canister while the cache data is written to the internal system flash. This memory
dump is called a fire hose memory dump. After the system is up again, this data is loaded
back to the cache for destage to the disks.

Figure 6-5 also shows the following ports, which are provided by the IBM Storwize V5000
node canister:
 Two 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports, which are used for management. Port 1 (left port)
must be configured. The second port is optional and is used for management. Both ports
can be used for iSCSI traffic.

Chapter 7. Midrange disk systems 123

5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

 Two USB ports. One port is used during the initial configuration or when there is a
problem. They are numbered 1 on the left and 2 on the right.
 Four serial attached SCSI (SAS) ports. They are numbered 1 on the left to 4 on the right.
The IBM Storwize V5000 uses ports 1 and 2 for host connectivity and ports 3 and 4 to
connect to the optional expansion enclosures. The IBM Storwize V5000 incorporates two
SAS chains and three expansion enclosures can be connected to each chain.
 Four Fibre Channel ports, which operate at 2 Gbps, 4 Gbps, or 8 Gbps. The ports are
numbered from left to right starting with 1.

Service port: Do not use the port marked with a wrench. This port is a service port only.

The two nodes act as a single processing unit and form an I/O group that is attached to the
SAN fabric, an iSCSI infrastructure or directly attached to hosts via FC or SAS. The pair of
nodes is responsible for serving I/O to a volume. The two nodes provide a highly available
fault-tolerant controller so that if one node fails, the surviving node automatically takes over.
Nodes are deployed in pairs that are called I/O groups.

One node is designated as the configuration node, but each node in the control enclosure
holds a copy of the control enclosure state information.

The IBM Storwize V5000 supports two I/O groups in a clustered system. The terms node
canister and node are used interchangeably throughout this book.

7.1.3 Expansion enclosure

The optional IBM Storwize V5000 expansion enclosure contains two expansion canisters,
disk drives, and two power supplies.

Figure 6-6shows an overview of the Storwize V5000 expansion enclosure

Figure 7-6 shows an overview of the IBM Storwize V5000 rear view of the expansion
enclosure.

Figure 7-6 IBM Storwize V5000 rear view of the expansion enclosure

The expansion enclosure power supplies are the same as the control enclosure. There is a
single power lead connector on each power supply unit.

Figure 6-7 shows the IBM Storwize V5000 expansion canister ports.

124 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm

Figure 7-7 IBM Storwize V5000 expansion canister ports

As shown in Figure 6-7, each expansion canister provides two SAS interfaces that are used to
connect to the control enclosure and any optional expansion enclosures. The ports are
numbered 1 on the left and 2 on the right. SAS port 1 is the IN port and SAS port 2 is the OUT
port.

Use of the SAS connector 1 is mandatory because the expansion enclosure must be
attached to a control enclosure or another expansion enclosure. SAS connector 2 is optional
because it is used to attach to more expansion enclosures.

Each port includes two LEDs to show the status. The first LED indicates the link status and
the second LED indicates the fault status.

For more information about LEDs and ports, see the following website:

http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/v5000_ic/index.jsp

Figure 7-8 shows an overview of the hardware components of the IBM Storwize V5000
solution.

Chapter 7. Midrange disk systems 125

5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Figure 7-8 IBM Storwize V5000 hardware components

7.1.4 Host connectivity

With 1 Gb iSCSI, 8 Gb FC, and 6 Gb SAS host interfaces that are supported as standard, the
IBM Storwize V5000 is designed to accommodate the most common storage networks. This
broad networking support enables deployment of IBM Storwize V5000 in existing storage
network infrastructures.

The 1 Gb iSCSI and 6 Gb SAS interfaces are built into the node canister hardware and the 8
Gb FC interface is supplied by a host interface card (HIC). The 8 Gb FC HIC is the only HIC
that is available and is supplied as standard.

7.1.5 Disk drive types

IBM Storwize V5000 enclosures support SSD, SAS, and Nearline SAS drive types. Each
drive has two ports (two PHYs) and I/O can be sent down both paths simultaneously.

Table 7-2 Disk drive types

Drive type Speed Size

2.5-inch form factor Solid-state disk N/A 200 and 400 GB

126 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm

Drive type Speed Size

2.5-inch form factor SAS 10,000 rpm 600 GB, 900 GB, and
1.2 TB

2.5-inch form factor SAS 15,000 rpm 146 and 300 GB

2.5-inch form factor Nearline SAS 7,200 rpm 1 TB

3.5-inch form factor SAS 10,000 rpm 900 GB and 1.2 TBa

3.5-inch form factor SAS 15,000 rpm 300 GBb

3.5-inch form factor Nearline SAS 7,200 rpm 2 TB, 3 TB, and 4 TB
a. 2.5-inch drive in a 3.5-inch drive carrier
b. 2.5-inch drive in a 3.5-inch drive carrier

7.1.6 IBM Storwize V5000 features

This section describes the features of the IBM Storwize V5000.

Mirrored volumes
IBM Storwize V5000 provides a function that is called storage volume mirroring, which
enables a volume to have two physical copies. Each volume copy can belong to a different
storage pool, be generic or a thin-provisioned, and be on different physical storage systems,
which provides a high-availability solution.

When a host system issues a write to a mirrored volume, IBM Storwize V5000 writes the data
to both copies. When a host system issues a read to a mirrored volume, IBM Storwize V5000
requests it from the primary copy. If one of the mirrored volume copies is temporarily
unavailable, the IBM Storwize V5000 automatically uses the alternative copy without any
outage for the host system. When the mirrored volume copy is repaired, IBM Storwize V5000
resynchronizes the data.

A mirrored volume can be converted into a non-mirrored volume by deleting one copy or by
splitting away one copy to create a non-mirrored volume. The mirrored volume copy can be
any type: image, striped, sequential, and thin-provisioned or not. The two copies can be
different volume types.

The use of mirrored volumes also can assist with migrating volumes between storage pools
that have different extent sizes. Mirrored volumes also can provide a mechanism to migrate
fully allocated volumes to thin-provisioned volumes without any host outages.

The Volume Mirroring feature is included as part of the base software and no license is
required.

Thin provisioning
Volumes can be configured to be thin-provisioned or fully allocated. Concerning application
reads and writes, a thin-provisioned volume behaves as though they were fully allocated.
When a volume is created, the user specifies two capacities: the real capacity of the volume
and its virtual capacity.

The real capacity determines the quantity of MDisk extents that are allocated for the volume.
The virtual capacity is the capacity of the volume that is reported to IBM Storwize V5000 and
to the host servers.

Chapter 7. Midrange disk systems 127

5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

The real capacity is used to store the user data and the metadata for the thin-provisioned
volume. The real capacity can be specified as an absolute value or a percentage of the virtual
capacity.

The thin provisioning feature can be used on its own to create over-allocated volumes, or it
can be used with FlashCopy. Thin-provisioned volumes can be used with the mirrored volume
feature as well.

A thin-provisioned volume can be configured to autoexpand, which causes the IBM Storwize
V5000 to automatically expand the real capacity of a thin-provisioned volume as its real
capacity is used. This parameter prevents the volume from going offline. Autoexpand
attempts to maintain a fixed amount of unused real capacity on the volume. This amount is
known as the contingency capacity. The default setting is 2%.

The contingency capacity initially is set to the real capacity that is assigned when the volume
is created. If the user modifies the real capacity, the contingency capacity is reset to be the
difference between the used capacity and real capacity.

A volume that is created with a zero contingency capacity goes offline when it must expand. A
volume with a nonzero contingency capacity stays online until it is used up.

Autoexpand does not cause the real capacity to grow much beyond the virtual capacity. The
real capacity can be manually expanded to more than the maximum that is required by the
current virtual capacity and the contingency capacity is recalculated.

To support the autoexpansion of thin-provisioned volumes, the storage pools from which they
are allocated have a configurable warning capacity. When the used free capacity of the group
exceeds the warning capacity, a warning is logged. For example, if a warning of 80% is
specified, the warning is logged when 20% of the free capacity remains.

A thin-provisioned volume can be converted to a fully allocated volume by using volume

mirroring (and vice versa).

The Thin Provisioning feature is included as part of the base software and no license is
required.

Easy Tier
IBM Easy Tier provides a mechanism to seamlessly migrate hot spots to the most appropriate
tier within the IBM Storwize V5000 solution. This migration can be to different tiers of internal
drive within IBM Storwize V5000 or to external storage systems that are virtualized by IBM
Storwize V5000.

The Easy Tier function can be turned on or off at the storage pool and volume level. It is
possible to demonstrate the potential benefit of Easy Tier in your environment before you
install SSDs by using the IBM Storage Advisor Tool.

The IBM Easy Tier feature is licensed per enclosure.

Storage Migration
By using the IBM Storwize V5000 Storage Migration feature, you can easily move data from
other Fibre Channel attached external storage to the internal capacity of the IBM Storwize
V5000. Migrating data from other storage to the IBM Storwize V5000 storage system provides
benefit from more functions, such as, the easy-to-use GUI, internal virtualization, thin
provisioning, and Copy Services.

128 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm

The Storage Migration feature is included as part of the base software and no license is
required.

FlashCopy
FlashCopy copies a source volume on to a target volume. The original contents of the target
volume is lost. After the copy operation starts, the target volume has the contents of the
source volume as it existed at a single point in time. Although the copy operation takes time,
the resulting data at the target appears as though the copy was made instantaneously.

FlashCopy is sometimes described as an instance of a time-zero (T0) copy or a point-in-time

(PiT) copy technology.

FlashCopy can be use on multiple source and target volumes. FlashCopy permits the
management operations to be coordinated so that a common single point-in-time is chosen
for copying target volumes from their respective source volumes.

IBM Storwize V5000 also permits multiple target volumes to be copied with FlashCopy from
the same source volume. This capability can be used to create images from separate points
in time for the source volume, and to create multiple images from a source volume at a
common point in time. Source and target volumes can be thin-provisioned volumes.

Reverse FlashCopy enables target volumes to become restore points for the source volume
without breaking the FlashCopy relationship and without waiting for the original copy
operation to complete. IBM Storwize V5000 supports multiple targets and thus multiple
rollback points.

The FlashCopy feature is licensed per enclosure.

Remote copy
The remote copy can be maintained in one of two modes: synchronous or asynchronous.

With the IBM Storwize V5000, Metro Mirror and Global Mirror are the IBM branded terms for
the functions that are synchronous remote copy and asynchronous remote copy.

By using the Metro Mirror and Global Mirror Copy Services features, you can set up a
relationship between two volumes so that updates that are made by an application to one
volume are mirrored on the other volume. The volumes can be in the same system or on two
different systems.

For both the Metro Mirror and Global Mirror copy types, one volume is designated as the
primary and the other volume is designated as the secondary. Host applications write data to
the primary volume and updates to the primary volume are copied to the secondary volume.
Normally, host applications do not do I/O operations to the secondary volume.

The Metro Mirror feature provides a synchronous copy process. When a host writes to the
primary volume, it does not receive confirmation of I/O completion until the write operation
completes for the copy on the primary and secondary volumes. This process ensures that the
secondary volume is always up-to-date with the primary volume if a failover operation must be
done.

The Global Mirror feature provides an asynchronous copy process. When a host writes to the
primary volume, confirmation of I/O completion is received before the write operation
completes for the copy on the secondary volume. If a failover operation is done, the
application must recover and apply any updates that were not committed to the secondary
volume. If I/O operations on the primary volume are paused for a brief time, the secondary
volume can become an exact match of the primary volume.

Chapter 7. Midrange disk systems 129

5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Global Mirror can operate with or without cycling. When it is operating without cycling, write
operations are applied to the secondary volume as soon as possible after they are applied to
the primary volume. The secondary volume is less than one second behind the primary
volume, which minimizes the amount of data that must be recovered in the event of a failover.
However, this process requires that a high-bandwidth link is provisioned between the two
sites.

When Global Mirror operates with cycling mode, changes are tracked and where needed
copied to intermediate change volumes. Changes are transmitted to the secondary site
periodically. The secondary volumes are much further behind the primary volume, and more
data must be recovered in the event of a failover. Because the data transfer can be smoothed
over a longer time period, however, lower bandwidth is required to provide an effective
solution.

The IBM Remote Copy feature is licensed per enclosure

External virtualization
By using this feature, you can consolidate FC SAN-attached disk controllers from various
vendors into pools of storage. In this way, the storage administrator can manage and
provision storage to applications from a single user interface and use a common set of
advanced functions across all the storage systems under the control of the IBM Storwize
V5000.

Note: The External Virtualization feature is licensed per disk enclosure.

7.2 IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node

The IBM Flex System V7000 is a new category of computing, a Smarter Computing System
that lowers cost and improves productivity. By combining the flexibility of a general-purpose
system, the elasticity of cloud, and the simplicity of an appliance, expert integrated systems
can transform the IT lifecycle.

.The IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node is a modular storage system that is designed to
fit into the IBM PureFlex System chassis. The IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node
includes the capability to virtualize its own internal storage in the same manner as the IBM
Storwize V7000 does. The IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node is built upon the software
base of the IBM Storwize V7000, which uses technology from IBM System Storage SAN
Volume Controller for virtualization and advanced functions, the IBM System Storage DS8000
family for its RAID configurations of the internal disks, and the highly flexible graphical user
interface (GUI) of the IBM XIV Storage Subsystem for management.

IBM Storwize V7000 delivers superior performance, flexibility, ease of use, and
enterprise-class function in a midrange storage system. IBM Flex System delivers high
performance, dense packaging, and integrated management. When you combine those two
solutions, you get IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node, with all the performance, flexibility,
ease of use, and function of Storwize V7000 Integrated into the IBM Flex System.

130 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm

Figure 7-9 IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node

7.2.1 IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node features

IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node provides the following benefits:
 Enterprise-class reliability and performance in a Mid-Range offering
 Integrated packaging for lower total solution costs
 Rapid deployment into existing data center environments
 Easy to use with integrated single-point management
 Dynamic workload orchestration with high-speed, integrated fabric
 IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node Product Features
 Storwize V7000 features: FlashCopy, Easy Tier, Thin Provisioning, Metro/Global Mirroring
and External Virtualization
 Up to 240 internal drives
 Advanced performance with Easy Tier SSD optimization
 Maximum reliability with redundant dual controllers
 Integrated GUI providing familiar interface and breakthrough ease of use

When virtualizing external storage arrays, an IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node can
provide up to 32 PB of usable capacity. An IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node supports a
range of external disk systems similar to what the IBM Storwize V7000 system supports
today. A control enclosure contains two control canisters; an expansion enclosure contains
two expansion canisters. Both of these enclosures can contain up to 24 disk drives of the
2.5-inch form factor.

The IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node provides a number of configuration options that
are aimed at simplifying the implementation process. It also includes automated instruction
steps, called Directed Maintenance Procedures (DMP), to help resolving any events that
might occur. The IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node is a clusterable, scalable, storage
system, and an external virtualization device.

An IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node is designed to be a scalable, internal storage
system, to support the compute nodes of the IBM PureFlex System environment. It must
contain one control enclosure and can optionally include one or two internal expansion
enclosures with the control enclosure. Each enclosure can house up to 24 disk drives (DDM)
for a total of 72 drives in the IBM Flex System chassis.

The control enclosure can support the addition of up to nine IBM Storwize V7000 expansion
enclosures that are connected externally. The additional expansions allow for a total of 240
disks drives; or for a maximum capacity of 348 TB supported per control enclosure.

Chapter 7. Midrange disk systems 131

5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Additionally, the IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node can have up to four control
enclosures that are clustered together to create a total storage node solution capable of 960
disks drives, or 2.88 PB capacity in all.

Attention: For maximum capacity numbers, the 2076-212 expansion enclosure and 3 TB
SAS Nearline drives must be used.

7.2.2 IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node

The IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node is based on two enclosure types; IBM Flex
System V7000 Control Enclosure and the IBM Flex System V7000 Expansion Enclosure.
Both of these enclosures are in a newly designed common chassis that fits into the IBM
PureFlex System chassis. This new enclosure requires two high double wide slot spaces be
available per enclosure. Figure 7-10 shows an IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node that is
built with a control enclosure and one expansion enclosure.

C A

Figure 7-10 IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node

Both the control and expansion enclosures connect to the Pure Flex system chassis through
the midplane interconnect for their power and internal control connections. The control
enclosure (A) also connects to the IBM PureFlex System I/O modules and switches for host
IO and replication features through this midplane. The control enclosure also houses a pair of
redundant control canisters along with their cache batteries for backup

The expansion enclosure (B) uses the Serial Attached SCSI (SAS2) 6 Gbps chain connection
on the front of the control and expansion canisters (C) for connecting the chain together for
drive IO and expansion control operations. The expansion enclosure houses a pair of
expansion canisters instead of the control canisters through which it connects and manages
the SAS chain connections to its disk drives. It also has a second SAS2 port though which it
provides a connection for continuing the chain to on to more expansions behind it.

An IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node is designed mainly to be a scalable, internal
storage system, to support the compute nodes of the IBM PureFlex System. When needed it

132 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm

can be expanded it its capacity by adding external IBM Storwize V7000 expansion enclosures
to its chain. Both the 2076-212 and the 2076-224 model of the Storwize V7000 expansions
are supported. A maximum of nine total expansions can be connected to a control enclosure.

There are four optional configurations for host connections that use optional host interface
cards (HIC). The configuration of the host attachments on one control canister must match
the configuration of the second:
 A single two port 10 Gbps Ethernet host interface
 A dual two port 10 Gbps Ethernet host interface
 A single two port 10 Gbps Ethernet host interface, plus a four port FC host interface
 A four port FC host interface

The 10 Gbps Ethernet ports (two per canister) are for iSCSI host attachment, FCoE
attachment, or both.

There is a 6 Gbps SAS port on the canister for connecting optional expansions enclosures.

Figure 7-11 Shows the control canister has one SAS2 port per canister for the connection of
expansion enclosures to add capacity. Two USB connections are available to support
maintenance actions as required.

Figure 7-11 Control enclosure with connection ports and indicators

7.2.3 IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node capabilities

For a complete and updated list of IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node configuration limits
and restrictions, see the following website:
http://www.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=ssg1S1004369

Chapter 7. Midrange disk systems 133

5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

7.2.4 IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node functions

The following functions are available with IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node:
 Thin provisioning (no license required):
Traditional fully allocated volumes allocate real physical disk capacity for an entire volume
even if that capacity is never used. Thin-provisioned volumes allocate real physical disk
capacity only when data is written to the logical volume.
 Volume mirroring (no license required):
This function provides a single volume image to the attached host systems while it
maintains pointers to two copies of data in separate storage pools. Copies can be on
separate disk storage systems that are being virtualized. If one copy fails, IBM Flex
System V7000 Storage Node provides continuous data access by redirecting I/O to the
remaining copy. When the copy becomes available, automatic re synchronization occurs.
 FlashCopy (included with the base IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node license):
This function provides a volume level point-in-time copy function for any storage that is
being virtualized by the IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node. This function is designed
to create copies for backup, parallel processing, testing, and development, and have the
copies available almost immediately.
IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node includes the following FlashCopy functions:
– Full and incremental copy:
This function copies only the changes from either the source or target data since the
last FlashCopy operation and is designed to enable completion of point-in-time online
backups much more quickly than using traditional FlashCopy.
– Multitarget FlashCopy:
IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node supports copying of up to 256 target volumes
from a single source volume. Each copy is managed by a unique mapping and, in
general, each mapping acts independently and is not affected by other mappings
sharing the source volume.
– Cascaded FlashCopy:
This function is used to create copies of copies and supports full, incremental, or
nocopy operations.
– Reverse FlashCopy:
This function allows data from an earlier point-in-time copy to be restored with minimal
disruption to the host.
– FlashCopy nocopy with thin provisioning:
This function provides a combination of using thin-provisioned volumes and FlashCopy
together to help reduce disk space requirements when you make copies. There are two
variations of this option:
• Space-efficient source and target with background copy:
This function copies only the allocated space.
• Space-efficient target with no background copy:
This function copies only the space that is used for changes between the source
and target and is generally referred to as “snapshots”.
This function can be used with multi-target, cascaded, and incremental FlashCopy.
– Consistency groups:

134 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm

Consistency groups address the issue where application data is on multiple volumes.
By placing the FlashCopy relationships into a consistency group, commands can be
run against all of the volumes in the group. This action enables a consistent
point-in-time copy of all of the data, even though it might be on a physically separate
volume.
FlashCopy mappings can be members of a consistency group, or they can be operated
in a stand-alone manner, that is, not as part of a consistency group. FlashCopy
commands can be run to a FlashCopy consistency group, which affects all FlashCopy
mappings in the consistency group, or to a single FlashCopy mapping if it is not part of
a defined FlashCopy consistency group.
 Remote Copy feature:
Remote Copy is a licensed feature that is based on the number of enclosures that are
being used at the smallest configuration location. Remote Copy provides for the capability
to do either Metro Mirror or Global Mirror operations:
– Metro Mirror:
Metro Mirror provides a synchronous remote mirroring function up to approximately
300 km between sites. As the host I/O completes only after the data is cached at both
locations, performance requirements might limit the practical distance. Metro Mirror is
designed to provide fully synchronized copies at both sites with zero data loss after the
initial copy is completed.
Metro Mirror can operate between multiple IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node
systems.
– Global Mirror:
Global Mirror provides long-distance asynchronous remote mirroring function up to
approximately 8,000 km between sites. With Global Mirror, the host I/O completes
locally and the changed data is sent to the remote site later. This function is designed
to maintain a consistent recoverable copy of data at the remote site, which lags behind
the local site. There are two
Global Mirror can operate between multiple IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node
systems.
 Data Migration (no charge for temporary usage):
IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node provides a data migration function that can be
used to import external storage systems into the IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node
system.
This function allows you to do the following operations:
– Move volumes non-disruptively onto a newly installed storage system
– Move volumes to rebalance a changed workload
– Migrate data from other back-end storage to IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node
managed storage
 IBM System Storage Easy Tier (no charge):
This function provides a mechanism to seamlessly migrate hot spots to the most
appropriate tier within the IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node solution. This migration
might be to internal drives within IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node or to external
storage systems that are virtualized by IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node.
 Real Time Compression:
This function provides for data compression that uses the IBM Random-Access
Compression Engine (RACE), which can be used on a per-volume basis in real time on

Chapter 7. Midrange disk systems 135

5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

active primary workloads. Real Time Compression can provide as much as a 50%
compression rate for data that is not already compressed. It can help with reducing the
amount of capacity that is needed for storage, which can help with delaying further growth
purchases. Real Time Compression supports all storage that is attached to the IBM Flex
System V7000 Storage Node whether internal, external, or external virtualized storage.
A compression evaluation tool that is called the IBM Comprestimator can be used to
determine the value of using compression on a specific workload for your environment.

7.2.5 IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node licensing

IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node might require the following licenses:
 Enclosure
 External Virtualization
 Remote Copy (Advanced Copy Services: Metro Mirror / Global Mirror)
 Real Time Compression

Table 6-3 gives a summary of all the licenses that might be required.

Table 7-3 Licenses that might be required

License type Unit License name License required?

Enclosure Base + expansion IBM Storwize Family Yes

Physical Enclosure Software for Flex
Number System
V7000

External Virtualization Physical Enclosure IBM Flex System Optional addon feature
Number Of External V7000
Storage External Virtualization
Software

Remote Copy Physical Enclosure IBM Flex System Optional addon feature
Number V7000
Remote Mirroring
Software

IBM Real-time Physical Enclosure IBM Flex System Optional addon feature
Compression (RTC) Number V7000
Real-time
Compression
Software

FlashCopy N/A N/A No

Volume Mirroring N/A N/A No

Thin Provisioning N/A N/A No

Volume Migration N/A N/A No

Easy Tier N/A N/A No

136 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm

License requirements for migration:

With External Virtualization, the IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node allows customers
to bring a system in to their storage environment and quickly and easily migrate data from
existing storage systems to IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node.

To facilitate this migration, IBM allows customers 45 days from the date of purchase of the
IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node to use the External Virtualization function to
migrate data from an existing storage system to IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node.
Any usage thereafter, and ongoing usage of the external virtualization function of IBM Flex
System V7000 Storage Node, requires the purchase of a Flex System V7000 External
Virtualization license at a quantity equal to the capacity that is managed under the IBM
Flex System V7000 Storage Node.

Migrations that are performed at later points in time that replace other storage systems
with IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node, and thus requiring temporary virtualization of
that external storage system to perform that replacement activity, are granted a 45-day
period for usage of External Virtualization without having to purchase a license to complete
such a migration effort.

You must make your IBM sales representative aware of your intention and when you will
start this migration so that an end date can be tracked. It is your responsibility to ensure
that your systems are properly licensed for all external storage that is managed by IBM
Flex System V7000 Storage Node after those 45 days.

All license feature codes are listed in Table 6-4.

Table 7-4 IBM Storwize Family Software for Flex System V7000
Program Name Version Program Number/Program ID

IBM Storwize Family Software for Flex System V7000 7.1 5766-NX7/5639-NZ7

IBM Flex System V7000 Remote Mirroring Software 7.1 5766-RX7/5639-RE7

IBM Flex System V7000 External Virtualization 7.1 5766-EV7/5639-EX7

Software

IBM Flex System V7000 Real-time Compression 7.1 5766-CX7/5639-CM7

Software

7.2.6 Supported disk drives

Both the IBM Flex System V7000 Control Enclosure and the IBM Flex System V7000
Expansion Enclosure support up to 24 2.5-inch disk drives in their enclosures. Table 7-5
shows all the possible drive types that can be used in the internal enclosure drive slots.

Table 7-5 IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node internal supported drives
Feature Drive capacity Drive speed

AD31 146 GB 15K RPM SAS

AD32 300 GB 15K RPM SAS

AD21 300 GB 10K RPM SAS

AD23 600 GB 10K RPM SAS

Chapter 7. Midrange disk systems 137

5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Feature Drive capacity Drive speed

AD24 900 GB 10K RPM SAS

AD25 1.2 TB 10K RPM SAS

AD11 500 GB 7.2K RPM NL SAS

AD12 1 TB 7.2K RPM NL SAS

AD41 200 GB SSD SAS

Ad42 400 GB SSD SAS

The disk drives connect to the Pure Flex system chassis through the midplane interconnect
for their power and for the control enclosure, for their internal control and IO paths. The
expansion enclosures use Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) connections on the front of the control
and expansion canisters for disk IO and control commands.

7.2.7 IBM Storwize V7000 expansion enclosure

The IBM Storwize V7000 expansion enclosure can be optionally attached to the IBM Flex
System V7000 Storage Node for added capacity beyond the internal enclosures.

Though the IBM Storwize V7000 2076-224 enclosure is a 2.5 inch, 24 drive slot chassis; the
drives of this subsystem are not interchangeable with the IBM Flex System V7000 Storage
Node drives. Both drives use a different carrier and contain a different product identifier in
their code.

Therefore, the IBM Storwize V7000 expansions support their own drive types in their
enclosures. Create them in their own configurations and storage pools when you use them
with the IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node.

For details about those expansions, see“Expansion enclosures” on page 147.

7.2.8 SAS cabling requirements

With the IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node, an implementation of the new, smaller SAS2
cable connectors is used. On the IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node, the connectors are
based on the high density (HD) mini SAS connectors. There are short cables that are
provided for this connection (as shown in Figure 7-10 on page 132), which are ordered with
the internal expansion.

With the addition of external IBM Storwize V7000 expansion, an adapter can be used to
change the HD mini SAS to the mini SAS connection that is on the expansion. Figure 7-12 on
page 139 shows the cabling scheme and the differences in the cable connections of the two
expansions.

138 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm

Figure 7-12 IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node cabling internal SAS and external

The IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node is cabled directly from top to bottom down
through its expansions, including any additional external expansions.

7.2.9 IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node components

The IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node is an integrated entry / midrange virtualization
RAID storage to support and interface with the IBM Flex System. It brings these benefits:
 Single point of management for both server, network and internal storage and external
storage that is virtualized by the integrated IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node
 Offers improved access to critical data by keeping data close to the servers by minimizing
switch and cable hops
 Provides virtual servers fast shared storage access to better enable dynamic workload
assignments
 Moves the control of the virtual server storage over to the server administrators rather than
in the hands of the SAN administrators
 Uses the IBM Flex System chassis for lower solution costs, thus eliminating the need of
external switches, cables, SFPs, fans, power supplies, for production environments

The IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node consists of a set of drive enclosures. Control
enclosures contain disk drives and two control canisters and form an I/O group for its
management of more internal and external storage. Expansion enclosures contain drives and
are attached to control enclosures.

Chapter 7. Midrange disk systems 139

5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

The simplest use of the IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node is as a traditional RAID
subsystem. The internal drives are configured into RAID arrays and virtual disks are created
from those arrays.

The IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node can also be used to virtualize other storage
controllers, as described on the following website:
http://www.ibm.com/common/ssi/cgi-bin/ssialias?infotype=an&subtype=ca&appname=gpat
eam&supplier=897&letternum=ENUS112-135

The IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node supports regular and solid-state drives and can
use IBM Easy Tier to automatically place volume hot spots on better-performing storage.

7.2.10 Management and support tools

The IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node system can be managed through the IBM Flex
System Management Node (FSM), or by using the native management software that runs in
the hardware itself.

The FSM simplifies storage management in the following ways:

 Centralizes the management of storage network resources with IBM storage management
software
 Provides greater synergy between storage management software and IBM storage
devices
 Reduces the number of servers that are required to manage your software infrastructure
 Provides higher-level functions

Event notifications
The IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node can use Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) traps, syslog messages, and a Call Home email to notify you and the IBM Support
Center when significant events are detected. Any combination of these notification methods
can be used simultaneously.

Each event that IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node detects is assigned a notification type
of Error, Warning, or Information. You can configure IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node to
send each type of notification to specific recipients.

Call Home email

The Call Home feature transmits operational and error-related data to you and IBM through a
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server connection in the form of an event notification
email. When configured, this function alerts IBM service personnel about hardware failures
and potentially serious configuration or environmental issues. You can use the Call Home
function if you have a maintenance contract with IBM or if the IBM Flex System V7000
Storage Node is within the warranty period.

To send email, you must configure at least one SMTP server. You can specify as many as five
additional SMTP servers for backup purposes. The SMTP server must accept the relaying of
email from the IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node clustered system IP address. You can
then use the management GUI or the command-line interface to configure the email settings,
including contact information and email recipients. Set the reply address to a valid email
address. Send a test email to check that all connections and infrastructure are set up
correctly. You can disable the Call Home function at any time by using the management GUI
or the command-line interface.

140 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm

7.2.11 Additional references for Storwize V7000

Because of the common design of the software and procedures of the IBM Storwize V7000
and the IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node, the following information can be helpful.
 IBM Storwize V7000 Storage Support page
http://www.ibm.com/storage/support/storwize/v7000
 IBM Storwize V7000 Storage home page
http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/news/center/storwize_v7000/index.html
 Storwize V7000 Storage Supported hardware list
http://www.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=ssg1S1003908
 Storwize V7000 Storage Configuration Limit and Restrictions
http://www.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=ssg1S1003902
 Storwize V7000 Storage Online documentation
http://www.ibm.com/support/entry/portal/Documentation/Hardware/System_Storage/D
isk_systems/Mid-range_disk_systems/IBM_Storwize_V7000_%282076%29
 The Storwize V7000 Storage Online Information Center
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/storwize/ic/index.jsp
 IBM Flex System V7000 Storage Node Introduction and Implementation Guide,
SG24-8068
 IBM System Storage TS7600 with ProtecTIER Version 3.3, SG24-7968

Chapter 7. Midrange disk systems 141

5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

7.3 IBM Storwize V7000

IBM Storwize V7000 and Storwize V7000 Unified are virtualized storage systems to
complement virtualized server environments that provide performance, availability, advanced
functions, and highly scalable capacity in midrange disk systems.

The IBM Storwize V7000 is a powerful midrange disk system that is designed to be easy to
use and enable rapid deployment without more resources. Storwize V7000 offers IBM storage
virtualization, SSD optimization, and “thin provisioning” technologies that are built in to
improve storage utilization and to enable the system to be reconfigured to meet changing
needs quickly and easily. Storwize V7000 advanced functions also enable non-disruptive
migration of data from existing storage, simplifying implementation, and minimizing disruption
to users. IBM Storwize V7000 also allows you to virtualize and reuse existing disk systems.

Storwize V7000 supports block workloads, whereas Storwize V7000 Unified consolidates
block and file workloads into a single system.

Tip: Details about Storwize V7000 Unified can be found in 19.4, “IBM storage virtualization
family” on page 478.

The IBM Storwize V7000 solution provides a modular storage system that includes the
capability to consolidate external virtualized SAN-attached storage and its own internal
storage and present it as a centralized pool of storage. The IBM Storwize V7000 solution is
built upon the IBM SAN Volume Controller technology base and offers enterprise capabilities
from the IBM DS8000 family technology.

IBM PureFlex Systems, the new IBM family of expert computing systems, integrate server,
storage, networking, and management systems for Power Systems and System x
architectures. IBM Storwize V7000, integrated into PureFlex Systems, is designed to be easy
to use and enable rapid deployment. At the heart of your PureFlex System, Storwize V7000
can become part of your highly efficient, highly capable, next-generation information
infrastructure.

Simplified management is one of the key features from IBM Storwize V7000. It provides a
web user interface with a number of preset configuration options and automated wizards to
help resolve events that might occur. As the web graphical user interface (GUI) runs on the
IBM Storwize V7000 system, there is no need for a separate console.

IBM Storwize V7000 provides an active-active, clustered, scalable, and reliable storage
solution in addition to an external virtualization device.

There are four models of the Storwize V7000 control enclosures and two expansion
enclosures. All the models have internal disks slots, which support 3.5-inch or 2.5-inch Serial
Attached SCSI (SAS) drives only. Table 6-6 shows the model comparison.

Table 7-6 BM Storwize V7000 models

Model Cache FC / iSCSI / SAS Drive slots Power supply
ports

2076-112 (with 16 GB 8x8 Gb / 4x1 Gb / 12 x 3.5-inch Integrated dual

two node 4x6 Gb power supplies
canisters) with battery
backup

142 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm

Model Cache FC / iSCSI / SAS Drive slots Power supply

ports

2076-124 (with 16 GB 8x8 Gb / 4x1 Gb / 24 x 2.5-inch Integrated dual

two node 4x6 Gb power supplies
canisters) with battery
backup

2076-312 (with 16 GB 8x8 Gb / 12 x 3.5-inch Integrated dual

two node 4x1 Gb+4x10Gb / power supplies
canisters) 4x6 Gb with battery
backup

2076-324 (with 16 GB 8x8 Gb / 24 x 2.5-inch Integrated dual

two node 4x1 Gb+4x10Gb / power supplies
canisters) 4x6 Gb with battery
backup

2076-524 (with 64 GB or 16 Gb (FC) 24 x 2.5-inch Integrated dual

two node 128GB - optional 8 Gb (FC) power supplies
canisters) 10 Gb iSCSI / with battery
(FCoE), backup
1 Gb iSCSI

2076-212 (with Not applicable -- / -- / 4x6 Gb 12 x 3.5-inch Integrated dual

two node (N/A) power supplies
canisters) with battery
backup

2076-224 (with Not applicable -- / -- / 4x6 Gb 24 x 2.5-inch Integrated dual

two node (N/A) power supplies
canisters) with battery
backup

Figure 6-12 shows the front view of the 2076-112, 2076-212, and 2076-312 enclosures,
where the drives are positioned in 4 columns of 3 horizontal mounted drive assemblies.

Figure 7-13 IBM Storwize V7000 2076-112, 2076-212, 2076-312 enclosures.

Figure 7-14 shows the front view of the 2076-124, 2076-224, 2076-324 and 2076-524
enclosures, where the drives are positioned in 1 row of 24 vertically mounted drive
assemblies.

Figure 7-14 IBM Storwize V7000 2076-124, 2076-224, 2076-324 and 2076-524 enclosures.

Chapter 7. Midrange disk systems 143

5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

7.3.1 IBM Storwize V7000 components

The IBM Storwize V7000 is a modular storage solution that is composed of control and
expansion enclosures. Figure 7-15 shows a system that is composed of one control
enclosure and nine expansion enclosures. It is possible to mix 12 disk slots and 24 disk slots
models. Each Storwize V7000 enclosure takes 2 EIA units in a standard 19-inch rack.

Each enclosure fits disk drives, two power supplies, and two canisters. The dual power
supplies are redundant, hot-swap, and include cooling systems. Each power supply contains
an IEC C14 socket.

Figure 7-15 Example of a rack-mounted Storwize V7000 solution

144 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm

Control enclosures
Each IBM Storwize V7000 system has one control enclosure, which contains two node
canisters, in addition to disk drive slots and two power supply units (PSUs). Each canister has
an 8 GB cache with battery backup for cache destage to include flash memory in case of any
power failure.

The two nodes act as a single processing unit and form an I/O group that is attached to the
fabric with the Fibre Channel or iSCSI ports. The two nodes provide high availability and fault
tolerance because, if one node fails, the surviving node automatically takes

Each canister has four Fibre Channel ports, operating at 2, 4, or 8 Gbps, two 10/100/1000
Mbps iSCSI Ethernet ports, two 6 Gbps SAS ports, and two USB 2.0 ports. Models 2076-312
and 2076-324 have two more 10 Gbps iSCSI/FCoE Ethernet ports. The Fibre Channel ports
are used for fabric connection, and their use is optional. The 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet
ports are also used for iSCSI fabric connection in addition to management.

Figure 7-16 shows the 2076-112 and 2076-124 models without more 10 Gbps iSCSI/FCoE
ports.

Figure 7-16 Rear view of a Storwize V7000 control enclosure (2076-112 and 2076-124)

Figure 7-17 on page 145 shows 2076-312, 2076-324 and 2076-524 models with more 10
Gbps iSCSI/FCoE ports.

Figure 7-17 Rear view of a Storwize V7000 control enclosure (2076-312, 2076-324 and 2076-524)

Support: Direct Fibre Channel port to server Host Bus Adapter (HBA) and iSCSI port to
server Ethernet adapter are not supported. The use of Fibre Channel and Ethernet
switches is mandatory in order to connect servers to the corresponding ports.

The USB ports are used for initial configuration. The SAS ports are used for expansion
connection only.

Overview of the 2076-524 control enclosure

The IBM 2076 is the hardware component of the IBM Storwize V7000 disk system. Storwize
V7000 is a highly scalable virtualized, enterprise-class, flash-optimized storage system that is
designed to consolidate workloads into a single system for ease of management, reduced
costs, superior performance, and high availability.

Chapter 7. Midrange disk systems 145

5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Model 2076-524

The IBM 2076 Storwize V7000 SFF Control Enclosure Model 524 features two node canisters
and up to 128 GB cache (system total) in a 2U, 19-inch rack mount enclosure. 1 Gb iSCSI
connectivity is standard, with options for 16 Gb FC, 8 Gb FC, and 10 Gb iSCSI/FCoE
connectivity. It holds up to twenty-four 2.5-inch SAS drives and supports the attachment of up
to 20 Storwize V7000 expansion enclosures.

Storwize V7000 offers both LFF and SFF 12 Gb SAS expansion enclosure models. The
Storwize V7000 LFF Expansion Enclosure Model 12F supports up to twelve 3.5-inch drives,
while the Storwize V7000 SFF Expansion Enclosure Model 24F supports up to twenty-four
2.5-inch drives. High-performance disk drives, high-capacity nearline disk drives, and flash
(solid state) drives are supported. Drives of the same form factor can be intermixed within an
enclosure and LFF and SFF expansion enclosures can be intermixed within a Storwize
V7000 system.

Highlights of the IBM Storwize V7000

 IBM Storwize V7000 next-generation models offer increased performance and
connectivity, integrated compression acceleration, and more scalability with the following
features:
 Two node canisters, each with an eight-core processor and integrated hardware-assisted
compression acceleration
 64 GB cache (per system) standard, with optional 128 GB cache (per system) for
Real-time Compression workloads
 16 Gb Fibre Channel (FC), 8 Gb FC, 10 Gb iSCSI / Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE),
and 1 Gb iSCSI connectivity options
 12 Gb SAS expansion enclosures that support twelve 3.5-inch large form factor (LFF) or
twenty-four 2.5-inch small form factor (SFF) drives
 Scaling for up to 504 drives per system with the attachment of 20 Storwize V7000
expansion enclosures and up to 1,056 drives in a four-way clustered configuration
 The ability to be added into existing clustered systems with previous generation Storwize
V7000 systems
 Compatibility with IBM Storwize V7000 Unified File Modules for unified storage capability

For unified storage capability, Storwize V7000 can be combined with Storwize V7000 File
Modules to create a Storwize V7000 Unified solution that consolidates block and file
workloads into a single storage system for greater simplicity and efficiency.

All models are delivered in a 2U, 19-inch rack mount enclosure and include a three-year
warranty with customer replaceable unit (CRU) and onsite service. Optional warranty service
upgrades are available for enhanced levels of warranty service.

Storwize V7000 models are the next-generation hardware components of Storwize V7000
systems.

The Storwize V7000 LFF Expansion Enclosure Model 12F includes the following features:
 Two expansion canisters
 12 Gb SAS ports for control enclosure and expansion enclosure attachment
 Twelve slots for 3.5-inch SAS drives
 2U, 19-inch rack mount enclosure with ac power supplies

The Storwize V7000 SFF Expansion Enclosure Model 24F includes the following features:

146 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm

 Two expansion canisters

 12 Gb SAS ports for control enclosure and expansion enclosure attachment
 Twenty-four slots for 2.5-inch SAS drives
 2U, 19-inch rack mount enclosure with ac power supplies

Expansion enclosures
The Storwize V7000 systems can operate with internal disks only. As a scalable system, it is
possible to add expansion enclosures. Each expansion enclosure contains two expansion
canisters, disk drive slots, and power supplies, as shown in Figure 7-18. The expansion
enclosure power supplies are similar to the control enclosure power supplies but do not
contain a battery.

Figure 7-18 Rear view of a Storwize V7000 expansion enclosure

Each expansion canister, as shown in Figure 7-19, provides two SAS ports that are used to
connect to the control enclosure and other expansion enclosures in a dual, redundant way.

Figure 7-19 A single Storwize V7000 expansion canister

Chapter 7. Midrange disk systems 147

5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

This redundant connection is done as shown in Figure 7-20. There are two ways to connect to
each expansion enclosure, SAS Chain 1 and SAS Chain 2. Thus, there is no single point of
failure (SPOF) in the cabling connections.

Figure 7-20 Storwize V7000 control enclosure and expansion enclosures cabling diagram

Disk drive modules

The IBM Storwize V7000 enables available multiple performance tiers, with support for SSD,
SAS 2.0, and Nearline SAS 2.0 disk drives. Each SAS 2.0 drive is dual-ported, and I/O can
be sent down both paths simultaneously, as for Fibre Channel drives.

148 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm

Table 7-7 shows the available disk drive types.

Table 7-7 IBM Storwize V7000 disk drive types

Drive type Speed Size Form factor

SSD - 200 GB and 400 GB 2.5”

SAS 10.000 R 300 GB, 600 GB, and 900 GB 2.5”

SAS 15.000 R 146 GB and 300 GB 2.5”

SAS Nearline 7.200 R 1 TB 2.5”

SAS Nearline 7.200 R 2 TB and 3 TB 3.5”

Requirement: The SSD disk drives are 2.5” form factor only. To use them, it is necessary
to have at least one 2076-124, 2076-324, or 2076-224 enclosure in the installation.

7.3.2 IBM Storwize V7000 features

IBM Storwize V7000 features enterprise class scalability and connectivity, with support for the
following things:
 RAID 0, 1, 5, 6, 10 arrays
 Maximum of 240 internal drives in up to 9 expansion enclosures
 Maximum of 2,048 host volumes with up to 512 volumes per host
 Maximum capacity of 256 TB per volume
 Maximum of 256 Fibre Channel attached hosts
 Maximum of 64 iSCSI attached hosts
 Maximum of 256 combined (iSCSI and Fibre Channel hosts)
 Maximum of 4096 MDisks
 Maximum of 1 PB capacity per MDisk
 Maximum virtualization capacity of 32 PB

Table 7-8 describes advanced features and licensing.

Table 7-8 Storwize V7000 features and licensing information

Feature Licensing Required software
Thin provisioning No charge -

Volume mirroring

Data migration

Easy Tier Included in Storwize 5639-VM1

V7000 base license
FlashCopy

Full/incremental copy

Multi-target FlashCopy

Cascaded FlashCopy

Reverse FlashCopy

FlashCopy nocopy with thin provisioning

Metro Mirror and Global Mirror License required 5639-RM1

External storage virtualization License required 5639-EV1

Chapter 7. Midrange disk systems 149

5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Feature Licensing Required software

Real-time Compression License Requires 5639-CP1

License: All the Storwize V7000 software is licensed based on the number of enclosures.

Details about Storwize V7000 features can be found in Chapter 19, “IBM storage
virtualization” on page 471.

7.3.3 IBM Storwize V7000 management and support tools

The graphical user interface (GUI) is used to configure, manage, and troubleshoot the IBM
Storwize V7000 system. It is used primarily to configure RAID arrays and logical drives,
assign logical drives to hosts, replace and rebuild failed disk drives, and expand the logical
drives.

Overview
The GUI allows for troubleshooting and management tasks, such as checking the status of
the storage server components, updating the firmware, and managing the storage server.
Finally, it offers advanced functions, such as FlashCopy, Disk Mirroring, and Enhanced
Remote Mirroring. A Command Line Interface (CLI) for the IBM Storwize V7000 system is
also available.

In addition to the GUI, there are three more ways to manage the IBM Storwize V7000 system:
 With an existing SAN Volume Controller Master Console
 With the IBM Systems Storage Productivity Center (SSPC)
 Using the SSH protocol Command Live Interface (CLI)

Event notifications
IBM Storwize V7000 can use Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) traps, syslog
messages, and Call Home email to notify you and the IBM Support Center when significant
events are detected. Any combination of these notification methods can be used
simultaneously.

Each event that IBM Storwize V7000 detects is assigned a notification type of Error, Warning,
or Information. You can configure IBM Storwize V7000 to send each type of notification to
specific recipients.

7.3.4 IBM Storwize V7000 Version 7, Release 4.0

This version of Storwize V7000 includes support for child pools, VLAN, and Storwize V7000
Gen2 encryption, plus updates for security, volume protection, and Global Mirror distances.

For a complete description of the new technical changes and important information updates
for the Storwize V7000 system, see the following website:

http://www.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/ST3FR7/welcome

7.3.5 IBM Storwize V7000 supported environments

The IBM Storwize V7000 supports a comprehensive list of host operating systems and
multi-vendor disk storage compatibility. The complete list is available at the following website:

150 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm

http://www.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=ssg1S1003703

7.3.6 More information

For more information about the Storwize V7000, see theImplementing the IBM Storwize
V7000 V7.2, SG24-7938 Redbooks publication and the following websites:
 Product site
http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/disk/storwize_v7000/index.html
 Information Center:
http://www.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/api/redirect/storwize/ic/index.jsp
 Configuration Limits and Restrictions:
http://www.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=ssg1S1003702
 Techdocs Library:
http://www.ibm.com/support/techdocs/atsmastr.nsf/Web/Search
 Product Manuals:
http://www.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=ssg1S7003318

7.3.7 IBM Storwize terminology

Table 7-9 IBM Storwize Terminology
IBM Storwize V5000 term Definition

Battery Each control enclosure node canister in a IBM Storwize V5000

contains a battery.

Canister Canisters are hardware units that are subcomponents of a IBM

Storwize enclosures. Each enclosure contains two
canisters.

Chain A set of enclosures that is attached to provide redundant

access to the drives that are inside the enclosures. Each control
enclosure has two chains.

Clone A copy of a volume on a server at a particular point. The

contents of the copy can be customized while the contents of
the original volume are preserved.

Control enclosure A hardware unit that includes the chassis, node canisters,
drives, and power sources.

Data migration By using IBM Storwize, you can migrate data from
existing external storage to its internal volumes.

Drive IBM Storwize supports a range of hard disk drives

(HDDs) and SSDs.

Enclosure An enclosure is the basic housing unit for the IBM Storwize. It is the
rack-mounted hardware that contains all the
main components of the system: canisters, drives, and power
supplies.

Event An occurrence that is significant to a task or system. Events can

include completion or failure of an operation, a user action, or
the change in the state of a process.

Chapter 7. Midrange disk systems 151

5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

IBM Storwize V5000 term Definition

Expansion canister A hardware unit that includes the SAS interface hardware that
enables the node hardware to use the drives of the expansion
enclosure.

Expansion enclosure A hardware unit that includes expansion canisters, drives, and
power supply units.

External storage MDisks that are SCSI logical units (LUs) presented by storage
systems that are attached to and managed by the clustered
system.

Fibre Channel port Fibre Channel ports are connections for the hosts to get access
to the IBM Storwize.

Host mapping The process of controlling which hosts can access specific
volumes within a IBM Storwize.

Internal storage Array MDisks and drives that are held in enclosures and nodes
that are part of the IBM Storwize.

iSCSI (Internet Small Computer Internet Protocol (IP)-based storage networking standard for
System Interface) linking data storage facilities.

Managed disk (MDisk) A component of a storage pool that is managed by a clustered

system. An MDisk is part of a RAID array of internal storage or
a SCSI LU for external storage. An MDisk is not visible to a host
system on the storage area network.

Node canister A hardware unit that includes the node hardware, fabric, and
service interfaces, SAS, expansion ports, and battery.

PHY A single SAS lane. There are four PHYs in each SAS cable.

Quorum disk A disk that contains a reserved area that is used exclusively for
cluster management. The quorum disk is accessed when it is
necessary to determine which half of the cluster continues to
read and write data.

Serial-Attached SCSI (SAS) SAS ports are connections for the host to get direct attached
ports access to the IBM Storwize and expansion enclosure.

Snapshot An image backup type that consists of a point-in-time view of a

volume.

Storage pool A collection of storage capacity that provides the capacity

requirements for a volume.

Strand The SAS connectivity of a set of drives within multiple

enclosures. The enclosures can be control enclosures or
expansion enclosures.

Thin provisioning or thin The ability to define a storage unit (full system, storage pool, or
provisioned volume) with a logical capacity size that is larger than the
physical capacity that is assigned to that storage unit.

Volume A discrete unit of storage on disk, tape, or other data recording

medium that supports some form of identifier and parameter
list, such as, a volume label or input/output control.

Worldwide port names Each Fibre Channel port is identified by their physical port
number and worldwide port name (WWPN).

152 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm

7.4 IBM System Storage DCS3700

IBM System Storage DCS3700 is designed to meet the storage needs of highly scalable, data
streaming applications in high-performance computing environments. The “DCS” stands for
Deep Computing Storage. IBM already has the DCS9900 for large enterprise deployments, so
this smaller DCS3700 is targeted for midrange deployments. When combined with IBM
Spectrum Scale, the DCS3700 storage system can help organizations optimize the flow and
management of large file-based data while retaining ease-of-data access. Combining IBM
Spectrum Scale clustered file management software and the DCS3700 creates an extremely
scalable and dense file-based management system.

The IBM System Storage DCS3700 meets an organization’s need for more capacity within
their given space constraints. Designed for applications with high-performance streaming
data requirements, the DCS3700 offers optimal space utilization, low power consumption,
and high performance. Organizations can now have a storage solution to maximize storage
density, reduce operational expenditures, and ensure high productivity.

The DCS3700 provides a simple, efficient, and flexible approach to storage that is based on
seven generations of design knowledge and firmware development. The DCS3700 can
provide a cost-effective, fully integrated complement to IBM System x servers, IBM
BladeCenter, and IBM Power Systems for a wide variety of intensive computing
environments.

IBM System Storage DCS3700 is first midrange dual active storage, with two intelligent array
controllers and up 180 or 360 drives (with Performance Module Controllers). The machine
type for DCS3700 storage is 1818-80C. The machine type for IBM System Storage DCS3700
Expansion Unit is 1818-80E. The new DCS3700 model provides many new capabilities:
 IBM System Storage DCS3700 supports attachment for SAS and Fibre Channel host
connections.
 This new generation unifies Storage Manager and firmware releases, allowing for a
common management console to support the entry and midrange DS families.
 The Dynamic Disk Pooling feature enables easy storage configuration reducing
maintenance requirements
 Thin Provisioning, ALUA, VAAI, and Enhanced FlashCopy features deliver increased
utilization, higher efficiency, and performance.
 The 6 Gbps SAS technology for host and drive attachments and 8 Gbps Fibre Channel
allows the DCS3700 to be managed by SAN Volume Controller or Storwize V7000.
 It offers Try and Buy Licensing for Enhanced FlashCopy and Enhanced Remote Mirroring.
 Support is provided for greater capacity with new larger capacity SAS drive offerings.
 There is also support for low-power, highly reliable, and high-performance solid-state
drives (SSDs).

SSD drives: You can install up to 20 SSD drives in IBM Storage Subsystem DCS3700.

Chapter 7. Midrange disk systems 153

5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Figure 7-21 shows the front view of both chassis and expansion models.

Figure 7-21 DCS3700 and EXP3700 subsystem assembly from the front views

Figure 7-22 shows the DCS and EXP3700 subsystem assembly front view with cover.

Figure 7-22 DCS3700 and EXP3700 front view with cover.

Figure 7-22 DCS and EXP3700 subsystem assembly front view with cover

7.4.1 DCS3700 components

The DCS3700 storage server is a 4U rack mountable enclosure, which contains two RAID
controller modules, two power supplies, and up to 60 disk modules in one enclosure. See
Figure 7-23 for the component layout.

154 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm

DCS3700 or DCS3700 Expansion Unit

Power
Fans Supply

Controller
or ESM
Drives
in trays

Figure 7-23 DCS3700 and DCS3700 Expansion Unit Components

RAID controllers
The DCS3700 provides two different RAID controllers:
 Dual-active, intelligent array controllers with 2 GB (upgradeable to 4 GB), giving 8 GB total
cache for the subsystem, and supporting up to 180 disk drives in three enclosures. These
controllers have connections for the following ports that are built into them:
– Two 6 Gbps SAS host server attachment ports
– Drive side 6 Gbps SAS expansion ports
– Ethernet Management Ports
– Serial management port
 Performance Module Controllers, dual-active, intelligent array controllers with up to 24 GB,
giving 48 GB total cache for the subsystem, and supporting up to 360 disk drives in six
enclosures. These controllers have connections for the following ports that are built into
them:
– 4-Port FC 8 Gb/s Host connector on the base board
– Drive side 6 Gbps SAS expansion ports
– Ethernet Management Ports
– Serial management port

RAID controllers support RAID levels 0, 1, 3, 5, 6, 10 and, from firmware release 7.83.xx.xx,
Dynamic Disk Pools (DDP). The battery provides power if the cache needs to be destaged to
the SD flash card in case the power is disrupted.

The dual controller configuration is the only supported configuration on the DCS3700. The
upper controller is controller A and the lower one is controller B, when viewed from the rear of
the subsystem (Figure 7-24). Dual controller configurations offer redundant access to disk
storage. In case of controller or I/O path failure, the other controller will continue to provide
access to disk drives.

The RAID controllers, two redundant power supplies, and two fan modules are installed in the
rear of the subsystem as shown in Figure 7-24.

Chapter 7. Midrange disk systems 155

5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Figure 7-24 DCS3700 rear view

Figure 7-25 shows the IBM DCS Raid Controller rear view.

Figure 7-25 IBM DCS Raid controller rear view.

Host interface cards

As mentioned earlier, the DCS3700 can be ordered with two different controller types and in
depending on that you can add different host interface cards. More host server connectivity is
supported by using an optional daughter card. This interface card can provide for one of the
following configurations to be added to the DCS3700:
 For standard controllers:
– Four more SAS ports
– Eight FC ports (four per controller)
 For performance module controllers:
– Eight FC ports (4-port 8 Gbps FC ports per controller)

Both controllers must be equipped with the same daughter card option to enable the support
of the controller failover functions.

Requirements: Only one type of optional interface can be added to any one DCS3700
storage server. Mixing interface daughter cards between controllers in the same DCS3700
is not supported.

156 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm

Disk drives
The main advantage of a DCS3700 enclosure is that supports up to 60 drives in 4U. The disk
drives are installed at the front in five drawers, as shown in Figure 7-21 on page 154 and
Figure 7-23 on page 155.

Available drive types for each of these subsystems are shown here in Table 10.

Table 10 DCS3700 families HDD support

Drives supported DCS3700

SAS 15k R 300 GB

SAS 10k R 600 GB

SAS 10k R 900 GB

Nearline SAS 7.2k R 3 TB

Maximum drives 180 or 360

Storage system capacity (max) 108TB SAS / 540 TB SATA or 216 TB SAS / 1080 TB SATA

For more information about the latest drive support, see the following link:
http://www.ibm.com/common/ssi/rep_ca/6/649/ENUSA12-0986/ENUSA12-0986.PDF

The population order in the drawer is shown in Figure 7-26.

First Row of Drives 3 6 9 12

must be populated
in each drawer

2 5 8 11

NOTE: Drive
map is located on
front of drawer
1 4 7 10

Front
Figure 7-26 Drive Orientation/Population

7.4.2 Overview of IBM System Storage DCS3700

Table 11 on page 158 provides an overview of the IBM System Storage DCS3700.

Chapter 7. Midrange disk systems 157

5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Table 11 Overview of the IBM System Storage DCS3700

Item Description

Models DCS3700 storage system

DCS3700 with Performance Modules storage system
DCS3700 expansion unit

RAID controller Dual-active, intelligent controllers

Cache per controller Base DCS3700 storage system:

4 GB cache (2 GB per controller) with field or plant upgrades to 8 GB (4 GB per
controller)
DCS3700 with Performance Modules storage system:
12 GB, 24 GB or 48 GB (6 GB, 12 GB or 24 GB per controller)

Host Interface Base DCS3700 storage system:

Two 6 Gbps SAS host ports per controller standard with the option to add a
daughter card with additional connectivity
Two 6 Gbps SAS ports per optional host interface card
Four 8 Gbps Fibre Channel ports per optional host interface card (includes eight
8 Gb shortwave small form-factor plug-gable transceivers)
Two 10 Gbps iSCSI ports per optional host interface card

DCS3700 with Performance Modules storage system:

Four 8 Gbps Fibre Channel host ports per controller with the option to add
daughter cards with additional connectivity
Four 8 Gbps Fibre Channel ports per optional host interface card (includes eight
8 Gb shortwave small form-factor pluggable transceivers)
Four 6 Gbps SAS ports per optional host interface card
Two 10 Gbps optic iSCSI ports per optional host interface card

Drive Interface Two 6 Gbps SAS drive ports

Supported drives 6 Gbps SAS 3.5-inch drives:

2 TB 7.2k rpm nearline
3 TB 7.2k rpm nearline
4 TB 7.2k rpm nearline

6 Gbps SAS 2.5-inch drives:

300 GB 15k rpm
600 GB 10k rpm
900 GB 10k rpm
1.2 TB 10k rpm SAS 2.5-inch SSDs:
400 GB SSD
800 GB SSD

Data protection levels RAID levels 0, 1, 3, 5, 6, 10 or DPP

Software features Base DCS3700 storage system:

Thin provisioning with DDP, 128 storage partitions, 32 Enhanced FlashCopy
images, host-attachment support for Microsoft Windows and Linux on x86/IBM
POWER, IBM AIX, Mac OS and Solaris

DCS3700 with Performance Modules:

Thin provisioning with DDP, 512 storage partitions, 32 Enhanced FlashCopy
images, host-attachment support for Windows and Linux on x86/POWER, AIX,
Mac OS and Solaris

158 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm

Item Description

Maximum drives supported Base DCS3700 storage system:

Up to 180 drives per system with the attachment of two DCS3700 expansion
units (60 drives per enclosure), 20 drives minimum drive quantity per enclosurea

DCS3700 with Performance Modules:

Up to 360 drives per system with the attachment of five DCS3700 expansion
units (60 drives per enclosure), 20 drives minimum drive quantity per enclosurea

Fans and power supplies Two each per enclosure

Rack support Slim 4U, 19-inch rack mount enclosure

Management software IBM System Storage DS® Storage Manager

Warranty One-year warranty. On-site service 24x7, 4-hour average and same-day response

Size Fits in a standard 1,000 mm cabinet

Environment Operating temperature range: 10°C – 35°C (50°F – 95°F)

Heat output Storage system: 3,057 BTU/hr.

Expansion unit: 2,736 BTU/hr.

Supported systems System x, BladeCenter and Power Systems servers

Operating systems supported: Mac OS, Solaris (W-SAS Single Drive), Linux, AIX,
Microsoft Windows
a. A maximum of 20 SSDs are supported in DCS3700 controller enclosures.

7.4.3 IBM System Storage DCS3700 Expansion Unit

The IBM System Storage DCS3700 Expansion Unit allows for the growth of the DCS3700
storage subsystem up to the 180 or 360 drive maximum (depending on controller type).

The IBM System Storage DCS3700 Expansion Unit differs from the IBM System Storage
DCS3700 in that, in place of the controller module, it is equipped with an Environmental
Services Module (ESM).

Each ESM has a 6 Gbps x4 SAS connection that provides 24 Gbps maximum throughput.
Figure 7-27 shows a view of the IBM System Storage DCS3700 Expansion Unit ESM with its
port connections for cabling.

Figure 7-27 DCS Expansion Unit ESM

With the IBM System Storage DCS3700 Expansion Unit, only one of the two IN ports are
used on each ESM to connect expansions together into a cascaded loop configuration. As
shown in Figure 7-28, the cabling scheme that is used for connecting these expansions
follows what is known as a top down, bottom up method. It provides the expansion loops with
redundant paths to the enclosures, and if one expansion has a catastrophic failure, the others
are can still run. With a proper RAID layout, it can provide for uninterrupted operations.

Chapter 7. Midrange disk systems 159

5250_Ch07_Midrange_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Figure 7-28 DCS3700 Expansion Unit Cascaded Loop Configuration

160 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm

Chapter 8. Enterprise disk systems

The family of IBM Enterprise Disk Systems offers a broad range of scalable solutions to
address various enterprise storage needs. By using leading IBM technology, the enterprise
disk systems provide choice in functions, performance, and resiliency.

This chapter describes the features and major characteristics of the following enterprise disk
storage products:
 IBM System Storage DS8000 Series
 IBM System Storage DS8870 (type 242x model 961)
 IBM System Storage XIV (type 281x model 214)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999, 2015. All rights reserved. 161

5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

8.1 Enterprise disk family overview

The IBM Enterprise Disk Systems deliver high-performance, high-availability storage, with
flexible configurations for various business requirements. The IBM System Storage DS8000
and XIV deliver an enterprise storage continuum of systems that are designed to help simplify
the storage infrastructure, support business continuity, and optimize information lifecycle
management. See Figure 8-1 for an overview of the enterprise disk family.

Figure 8-1 Enterprise Disk Systems: DS8870(left), XIV Gen 3 (right)

For a quick overview of storage solutions, see the IBM System Storage Product Guide at this
website:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/resource/pguide/

All IBM disk products are listed at this website.

http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/disk/

8.1.1 DS8000 series overview

The IBM System Storage DS8000 series is designed for the most demanding, mission critical
environments that require the highest level of availability. The DS8000 series is designed to
set an entirely new industry standard for high performance and high capacity by delivering a
dramatic leap in performance and scalability.

All DS8000 series models consist of a storage unit and one or two management consoles.
Two is the preferred configuration, especially when you use copy services. The hardware is
optimized to provide enhancements in performance, connectivity, and reliability. The DS8000
series features several models in a new, higher-density footprint, while it reuses much of the
fundamental architecture of the previous IBM Enterprise Storage Server® (ESS) models. It
ensures that the DS8000 benefits from a stable and well-proven operating environment.

During recent years, the DS8000 series were developed and improved; this process is still
ongoing and brings new solutions and technologies to the DS Family. The following sections
describe innovations in the new implementations for the DS8870.

For more information about the DS8000, see the following references:
 Section 8.2, “DS8000 series” on page 164
 IBM System Storage DS8000: Architecture and Implementation, SG24-8886
 IBM DS8870 Architecture and Implementation, SG24-8085

162 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm

8.1.2 XIV series overview

The XIV Storage System architecture is designed to deliver performance, scalability, and
ease of management while harnessing the high capacity and cost benefits of 7200 R SAS
drives. The system employs off-the-shelf products as opposed to traditional offerings that use
proprietary designs and therefore require more expensive components. The primary
difference with this architecture is the use of up to independent PC servers joined in a grid
architecture. An integral part of the IBM broad spectrum of system storage and SAN offerings,
the XIV system is based on a grid of standard, off-the-shelf hardware components that are
connected in any-to-any topology by using massively paralleled InfiniBand switch. Its
innovative architecture is designed to deliver the highest levels of reliability, performance,
scalability, and functions at low overall cost, while providing unprecedented ease of
management.

For more information about XIV, see the following references:

 Section 8.4, “IBM XIV Storage System” on page 225
 The IBM XIV Storage System Architecture and Implementation, SG24-7659 IBM
Redbooks publication

IBM Enterprise Disk Systems are designed for high performance that takes advantage of IBM
leading technologies. In today’s world, enterprises need business solutions that can deliver
high levels of performance continuously every day, day after day. They also need a solution
that can handle various workloads simultaneously, so they can run business intelligence
models, large databases for enterprise resource planning (ERP), and online and Internet
transactions alongside each other. This section describes some of the business solutions that
are provided by IBM enterprise disk systems.

8.1.3 Infrastructure simplification

The IBM System Storage DS Family and XIV provide the opportunity to simplify your IT
infrastructure through consolidation and streamlined storage management.

Consolidating storage assets

Consolidation begins with interoperability. The IBM System Storage DS Family and XIV can
be connected across a broad range of server environment, including AIX, Linux, HP-UX, Sun
SOLARIS, Novell NetWare, UNIX, IBM z/VM®, and Microsoft Windows. IBM DS8000 series
also support IBM z/OS and IBM i. You can easily split storage capacity among the attached
servers, reducing the total number of storage systems required.

Streamlining storage management

The IBM System Storage DS Family and XIV incorporates streamlined management tools
with an easy-to-use and straightforward GUI based on the IBM converged storage GUI. It
allows users to manage multiple subsystems and controllers, create logical configurations,
and administer copy service management functions, all by a web browser (DS8870) or a thick
client (XIV).

There is a set of common functions for storage management, including the IBM System
Storage DS Command-Line Interface (DS CLI) and the IBM System Storage DS open
application programming interface (API). The XIV Storage System offers a comprehensive set
of Extended Command Line Interface (XCLI) commands to configure and monitor the system.
All the functions available in the GUI are also available in the XCLI.

Advanced copy functions and storage management tools are described later in this chapter.

Chapter 8. Enterprise disk systems 163

5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

8.1.4 Business continuity

The IBM Enterprise Family offers the capability to increase your IT continual operation
tolerance by data protection and compatible copying service.

Data protection
Many design characteristics and advanced functions of the IBM Enterprise Disk Systems
contribute to protect data effectively:
 Fault-tolerant:
The IBM System Storage DS8000 and XIV series are designed with no single point of
failure. They are fault-tolerant storage subsystems that can be maintained and upgraded
concurrently with user operations.
 RAID and mirroring protected storage:
The IBM DS8870 supports RAID 5, RAID 6, and RAID 10 configurations, or a combination
of them. This gives more flexibility when selecting the redundancy technique for data
protection. RAID 6 protection provides more fault tolerance than RAID 5 in the case of disk
failures and uses less raw disk capacity than RAID 10.
The XIV systems do not use a regular RAID. XIV mirrors every 1 MB data chunk in two
different modules. That way, there are always two copies of data in two different and
redundant parts of the system.

Copy Services
IBM FlashCopy (DS8870) and SnapShot (XIV) point-in-time copy functions support higher
application availability and continuity of operations because they are designed to shrink
backup window time. Metro and Global Mirror functions allow for creation of duplicate copies
of application data at remote sites for rapid recovery purposes.

The IBM System Storage DS8000 copy services are compatible across ESS 800, IBM
DS6000™, DS8100, DS8300, DS8700, DS8800, and the new DS8870. Thus, commands
scripts for an older system are generally able to be carried forward with little or no
modification for newer systems. The systems can also replicate to each other, so, for
example, the newest DS8870 can replicate to the oldest system in the family, an ESS 800. A
DS6000 can replicate to a DS8800, and so on. The ability to reuse an older ESS 800,
DS6000, or DS8000 with newer DS8000 systems can help lower the total cost of a disaster
recovery solution.

The IBM Storage System XIV supports business continuity through synchronous and
asynchronous differential mirroring that offers flexible backup and restore options. An XIV
Gen3 can replicate to a previous XIV model. The previous model must be at software version
10.2.4.e and IBM XIV Storage System Gen3 Software must be at 11.1. (See IBM United
States Software Announcement 212-037 dated 07 February 7, 2012.)

Copy Services can be managed and automated with Tivoli Storage Productivity Center. For
information about supported systems and functions, see Chapter 22, “IBM Tivoli Storage
Productivity Center” on page 563.

8.2 DS8000 series

Organizations in nearly every industry are facing the challenge of exponential data growth.
Storage systems are being stretched and multiple system architectures are combined to meet
these demands. The IBM System Storage DS8000 series offers high-performance, high
capacity, secure storage systems that are designed to deliver the highest levels of

164 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm

performance, flexibility, scalability, resiliency, and total overall value for the most demanding,
heterogeneous storage environments.

The DS8000 series offers a unique combination of flexibility, resiliency, performance, and
scalability, which can help address the many challenges that stem from the exponential
growth of data across the enterprise. As organizations evolve their data centers to become
smarter, they are looking for innovative ways to manage and adapt in today’s increasingly
competitive, global business environment, and the DS8000 series is designed to meet this
challenge.

DS8870 has similar scalability as previous DS8000 and DS8800 systems. The physical
storage capacity of the DS8870 can range from 518 TB to 2.3 PB. The system can start small
and easily scale to large levels of storage by adding DS8000 expansion enclosures to your
environment.

The DS8000 delivers robust, flexible, and cost-effective disk storage for mission-critical
workloads and helps to ensure exceptionally high system availability for continuous
operations in 24 x 7 environments.

A DS8870 system is shown in Figure 8-2.

Figure 8-2 DS8870 base frame with covers removed (left) and with cover (right)

8.2.1 The DS8870 with IBM POWER7 processor technology

The DS8870 high-performance flagship model features IBM POWER7 processor-based
server technology to help support high performance. Compared to prior models, the DS8870
is designed to deliver up to three times performance improvement in I/O operations per
second in transaction processing workload environments. The POWER7 processor delivers
improved performance of both sequential read and sequential write throughputs by up to 60%
and can enable up to 170% performance improvement in I/O operations per second in open
and CKD volumes as prior models.

The DS8870 offers a single socket 2-core processor complex and up to a dual socket 16-core
processor complex per controller.

The DS8870 delivers up to three times the performance of the DS8800 and provides new
leadership in Storage Performance Council (SPC) benchmarks.

Chapter 8. Enterprise disk systems 165

5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Refer to the SPC website for complete information on the SPC-1 and SPC-2 results at:

http://www.storageperformance.org/results/

IBM POWER7+ processor technology

The DS8870 features IBM POWER7+ server technology to help deliver high performance.
The DS8870 delivers up to 15% performance improvement in maximum IOPS in transaction
processing workload environments over the prior processor.

The DS8870 offers a 2-core 4.228 GHz P7+ processor complex and up to a 16-core 4.228
GHz P7+ processor complex per controller.

All-flash system and flash optimization

The DS8870 now supports an all-flash configuration. The all-flash indicator, feature number
0600, allows the customer to specify systems that are comprised solely of flash drives. For
customers that use small capacity disk drives in RAID-10 configurations to minimize I/O
response times, using an all-flash configuration instead can help improve I/O response times
while also reducing floor space and power requirements, all at a similar cost of ownership.

For the DS8870 POWER7+ systems, this release is flash-optimized to improve overall
performance of flash drives. Compared to a similar DS8870 POWER7 system, transactional
customers can see improvements up to 20% when they use a DS8870 POWER7+ 16-core
all-flash system and the new flash accelerator RPQ #08S1364. The flash accelerator RPQ is
only offered on all-flash (feature number 0600) DS8870 POWER7+ 16-core (feature number
4414) systems.

See Figure 8-3 on page 166 for configuration choices for the DS8870.

Max Flash
Max Disk Max Disk Max Host
Processor Memory (GB) Max Flash Interface Max 9xE
Model /Flash Drives Adapter (DA) Adapters
Cores Per System Cards Adapter Attach
(SFF) Pairs (HAs)
Pairs
Business Class Configuration:

961 2-core 16 0 144 0 1 4 0

961 2-core 32 60 144 2 1 4 0

961 4-core 64 120 240 4 2 8 0

961 8-core 128/256 120 1056 4 6 16 2

961 16-core 512/1024 120 1056 4 6 16 2

Enterprise Class Configuration:

961 2-core 16 0 144 0 1 4 0

961 2-core 32 60 144 2 1 4 0

961 4-core 64 120 240 4 2 8 0

961 8-core 128 120 1056 4 8 16 2

961 8-core 256 120 1536 4 8 16 3

961 16-core 512/1024 120 1536 4 8 16 3

All Flash Class Configuration:

961 8-core 256 240 n/a 8 n/a 16 n/a

961 16-core 512/1024 240 n/a 8 n/a 16 n/a

First Expansion Frame:

96E n/a n/a n/a 336 n/a 4 8 n/a

Second or Third Expansion Frame:

96F n/a n/a n/a 480 n/a n/a n/a n/a

Figure 8-3 DS8870 configuration matrix

166 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm

Upgrading a DS8800 to a DS8870

The conversion is a non-concurrent operation, requiring your planning, several days of onsite
IBM support and your full participation.

Model conversion summary:

 The model conversion does not change the machine type.
 Each DS8800 that is converted to DS8870 retains the existing (original DS8800) frame
serial numbers, worldwide node name (WWNN), and worldwide port names (WWPNs).
 IBM provides new frames, including the management console, processor enclosures,
power supplies, and I/O enclosures. The first expansion frame includes power supplies
and I/O enclosures. The second and third expansion frames include power supplies.
 The device adapters, host adapters, storage enclosure assemblies, and disk drives from
the existing DS8800 frames are moved into the new DS8870 frames.
 Each DS8800 frame or frames (without the adapters, storage enclosures and disk drives)
is returned to IBM.
 Applicable licensed machine-code keys from DS8800 need to be reapplied to the new
DS8870 after conversion and before logical configuration is created.
 Any additional upgrades that are planned for DS8870 must be done after the conversion is
completed.
 The existing DS8800 warranty is applied to the new DS8870 without extensions.
 The new DS8870 has less net capacity on the same drives because about 32 GB per rank
is required for formatting and metadata considerations. If your existing DS8800 is near
capacity before the model conversion, plan to purchase more storage. Otherwise, the net
capacity on the drives might not be sufficient.
 If the existing DS8800 has a secondary management-console feature that is associated
with it, a DS8870-compatible secondary management console is included when the model
conversion MES involves a DS8800 system that is managed by pair of management
consoles (primary and secondary). The secondary management console (if installed on
source DS8800) must have the same drive capacity and memory as the base DS8870.

For more information about the prerequisites, see the IBM Knowledge Center.

8.2.2 DS8000 concepts

This section explains DS8000 concepts, data types, storage hierarchy, and a mainframe
capability called Parallel Access Volumes.

Fixed block and count key data

The DS8000 series is compatible with mainframes and open systems. In this chapter and
other DS8000 related books, you will see the Fixed Block (FB) and Count Key Data (CKD)
denominations.

In fixed block (FB) architecture, the data (the logical volumes) are mapped over fixed-size
blocks or sectors. With an FB architecture, the location of any block can be calculated to
retrieve that block. This architecture uses tracks and cylinders. On a physical disk, there are
multiple blocks per track, and a cylinder is the group of tracks that exists under the disk heads
at one point in time without performing a seek operation.

In count-key-data (CKD) disk data architecture, the data field stores the user data. Because
data records can be variable in length, in CKD they all have an associated count field that

Chapter 8. Enterprise disk systems 167

5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

indicates the user data record size. The key field enables a hardware search on a key. The
commands that are used in the CKD architecture for managing the data and the storage
devices are called channel command words.

Open systems use FB architecture and mainframes use CKD architecture.

DS8000 storage hierarchy

The DS8000 series implement a virtualized storage hierarchy as discussed in “Virtualization
and configuration flexibility” on page 176. This configuration offers great flexibility in LUN
creation and use. This section describes some concepts that are important for understanding
DS8000 configurations.

Extent pools
An extent pool is a logical construct that is used to manage a set of extents of the same type
that are associated with a rank group.

When an extent pool is defined, it must be assigned a rank group and an extent type. One or
more ranks with the same extent type can be assigned to an extent pool, but a rank can be
assigned to only one extent pool. There can be as many extent pools as there are ranks.
There are no constraints on the number or size of ranks that are assigned to the extent pool.
All extents of the ranks that are assigned to an extent pool are independently available for
allocation to logical volumes that are associated with the extent pool.

Typically, all the ranks within an extent pool have the same characteristics relative to RAID
type, disk R, and disk interface rate. It allows for a differentiation of logical volumes by
assigning them to the appropriate extent pool for the desired characteristics. Different extent
sizes for the same device type (for example, count-key-data or fixed block) can be supported
on the same storage image, but these different extent types must be in different extent pools.

Logical control unit

A logical control unit (LCU) represents a logical subsystem for z System hosts.

For z System hosts, a logical subsystem represents an LCU. Each LCU is associated with
only one logical subsystem and groups logical volumes in groups of up to 256 logical
volumes.

An LCU also has significance in the way that replication is controlled in the open systems
world.

Logical volumes
A logical volume is the storage medium that is associated with a logical disk. It is typically on
one or more hard disk drives.

For the storage unit, the logical volumes are defined at logical configuration time. For
count-key-data (CKD) servers, the logical volume size is defined by the device emulation
mode and model. For fixed block (FB) hosts, you can define each FB volume (LUN) with a
minimum size of a single block (512 bytes) to a maximum size of 232 blocks or 2 TB.

A logical device that has nonremovable media has one and only one associated logical
volume. A logical volume is composed of one or more extents. Each extent is associated with
a contiguous range of addressable data units on the logical volume.

Logical configuration overview

In the storage hierarchy, you begin with a physical disk. Logical groupings of eight disks form
an array site. Logical groupings of one array site form an array. After you define your array

168 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm

storage type as CKD or FB, you can create a rank. A rank is divided into a number of
fixed-size extents. If you work with an open-systems host, an extent is 1 GB. If you work in an
IBM z System environment, an extent is the size of an IBM 3390 Mod 1 disk drive.

After you create ranks, your physical storage can be considered virtualized. Virtualization
dissociates your physical storage configuration from your logical configuration, so that volume
sizes are no longer constrained by the physical size of your arrays.

The available space on each rank is divided into extents. The extents are the building blocks
of the logical volumes. An extent is striped across all disks of an array.

Extents of the same storage type are grouped together to form an extent pool. Multiple extent
pools can create storage classes that provide greater flexibility in storage allocation through a
combination of RAID types, disk size, disk speed, and disk technology. It allows a
differentiation of logical volumes by assigning them to the appropriate extent pool for the
wanted characteristics. Different extent sizes for the same device type (for example, CKD or
FB) can be supported on the same storage unit, but these different extent types must be in
different extent pools.

A logical volume is composed of one or more extents. A volume group specifies a set of
logical volumes. By identifying different volume groups for different uses or functions (for
example, SCSI target, FICON/ESCON control unit, remote mirror and copy secondary
volumes, FlashCopy targets, and Copy Services), access to the set of logical volumes that
are identified by the volume group can be controlled. Volume groups map hosts to volumes.

Figure 8-4 shows a graphic representation of the logical configuration sequence.

Chapter 8. Enterprise disk systems 169

5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Figure 8-4 DS8000 storage hierarchy

Parallel access volumes

Parallel access volumes (PAVs) provide your system with access to volumes in parallel when
you use a z System or IBM S/390® host.

A PAV capability represents a significant performance improvement by the storage unit over
traditional I/O processing. With PAVs, your system can access a single volume from a single
host with multiple concurrent requests.

You must configure both your storage unit and operating system to use PAVs. You can use the
logical configuration definition to define PAV-bases, PAV-aliases, and their relationship in the
storage unit hardware. This unit address relationship creates a single logical volume,
providing concurrent I/O operations.

170 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm

Static PAV associates the PAV-base address and its PAV aliases in a predefined and fixed
method. That is, the PAV-aliases of a PAV-base address remain unchanged. Dynamic PAV,
however, dynamically associates the PAV-base address and its PAV aliases. The device
number types (PAV-alias or PAV-base) must match the unit address types as defined in the
storage unit hardware.

You can further enhance PAV by adding the IBM HyperPAV feature. IBM HyperPAV
associates the volumes with either an alias address or a specified base logical volume
number. When a host system requests IBM HyperPAV processing and the processing is
enabled, aliases on the logical subsystem are placed in an IBM HyperPAV alias access state
on all logical paths with a path group ID.

Support: The IBM HyperPAV feature is only supported on FICON channel paths.

PAVs can improve the performance of large volumes. You get better performance with one
base and two aliases on a 3390 Model 9 than from three 3390 Model 3 volumes with no PAV
support. With one base, it also reduces storage management costs that are associated with
maintaining large numbers of volumes. The alias provides an alternative path to the base
device. For example, a 3380 or a 3390 with one alias has only one device to write to, but can
use two paths.

The storage unit supports concurrent or parallel data transfer operations to or from the same
volume from the same system or system image for z System or S/390 hosts. PAV software
support enables multiple users and jobs to simultaneously access a logical volume. Read and
write operations can be accessed simultaneously to different domains. (The domain of an I/O
operation is the specified extents to which the I/O operation applies.)

8.2.3 The DS8000 series design keys

The DS8000 series incorporates performance, resiliency, and scalability features. This
section describes key architectural basics of DS8000 and improvements of DS8870.
The fundamental architecture of DS8870 is similar to the predecessor DS8100, DS8300,
DS8700, and DS8800 models. This continuity ensures that the DS8870 can benefit from a
stable and well-proven operating environment, offering the optimum in availability. Its
hardware is optimized to provide higher performance, connectivity, and reliability.

Server-based design
The design decision to use processor memory as I/O cache is a key element of the IBM
Enterprise storage architecture. Performance improvements can be traced to the capabilities
of the processor speeds, the L1/L2 cache sizes and speeds, the memory bandwidth and
response time, and the PCI bus performance. This architecture is used since the first ESS E
models, using IBM PowerPC® based RS6000 H50 servers, to the POWER7 based servers
on the DS8870 model.

With the DS8000 series, the cache access is accelerated further by making the non-volatile
storage (NVS) a part of the main memory. Part of the memory is used for the operating
system and another part in each controller card acts as non-volatile storage (NVS), but most
of the memory is used as cache. This design to use processor memory makes cache
accesses very fast.

Chapter 8. Enterprise disk systems 171

5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

IBM POWER processor technology

The DS8100 and the DS8300 used the IBM POWER5 server technology. They used 64-bit
POWER5 microprocessors in dual 2-way or dual 4-way processor complexes, with up to 256
GB of cache.

The DS8700 uses the IBM POWER6®, and the DS8800 uses the IBM POWER6+™
processor. They both run symmetric multiprocessor (SMP) system features two-way or
four-way processor configuration.

The DS8870 uses POWER7+ processors in Power 740 servers. This system features 2-way,
4-way, 8-way, and 16-way processor choices. The performance improvements are
substantial. The DS8870 delivers the following advantages:
 Up to three times higher performance compared to DS8800
 Improved security with FDE as standard on all systems

Multipathing software
IBM Multipath Subsystem Device Driver (SDD) provides load balancing and enhanced data
availability in configurations with more than one I/O path between the host server and the
storage server. Most vendors’ priced multipathing software selects the preferred path at the
time of initial request. IBM free of charge preferred path multipathing software dynamically
selects the most efficient and optimum path to use at each data interchange during read and
write operations.

Multi-tiered storage environments

The DS8000 series is ideally suited to a multi-tiered storage environment. This helps
minimize storage costs by retaining frequently accessed or high-value data on higher
performance disk and archiving less frequently accessed or less valuable information about
less-costly and high-capacity disk.

Switched Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop (Switched FC-AL)

There is a switched FC-AL implementation in the DS Family (Figure 8-5). This switching
technology uses a point-to-point connection to each disk drive and adapter, which allows
maximum bandwidth for data movement, eliminates the bottlenecks of loop designs, and
allows for specific disk drive fault indication and isolation in the same time. Each disk is
attached to both switches. Whenever the device adapter connects to a disk, it uses a switched
connection to transfer data. It means that all data travels by the shortest possible path.

Figure 8-5 Disk enclosure switched connections (considering DS8700 Fibre Channel connections)

172 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm

Features of FC-AL technology

Key features of switched FC-AL technology are as follows:
 Standard FC-AL communication protocol from DA to drives
 Direct point-to-point links are established between DA and each drive
 Isolation capabilities in case of drive failures, providing easy problem determination
 Predictive failure statistics
 Simplified expansion: No cable rerouting is required when you add another disk enclosure

The DS8000 architecture employs dual redundant switched FC-AL access to each of the disk
enclosures. The key benefits of doing so are as follows:
 Two independent networks to access the disk enclosures
 Four access paths to each drive
 Each device adapter port operating independently
 Double the bandwidth over traditional FC-AL loop implementations

Figure 8-6 shows the connections in a DS8870.

Figure 8-6 DS8870 switched disk expansion

Chapter 8. Enterprise disk systems 173

5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Figure 8-7 shows how each DS8870 DA connects to the two disk networks (loops).

Figure 8-7 DS8870 switched disk expansion

Expansion is achieved by adding enclosures to the expansion ports of each switch. Each loop
can potentially have up to six enclosures.

Arrays across loops

Each array site consists of eight Disk drive modules (DDMs). Four DDMs are taken from the
upper enclosure in an enclosure pair, and four are taken from the lower enclosure in the pair.
It means that when a RAID array is created on the array site, half of the array is on each
enclosure. Because the front enclosures are on one switched loop, and the rear enclosures
are on a second switched loop, this splits the array across two loops. It is called array across
loops (AAL).

Four-path switched drive subsystem

There are four paths from the device adapters to each disk drive to provide greater data
availability in the event of multiple failures along the data path (Figure 8-8). The four paths
provide two FC-AL device interfaces, each with two paths such that either path can be used to
communicate with any disk drive on that device interface (in other words, the paths are
redundant). One device interface from each device adapter connects to a set of FC-AL
devices such that either device adapter has access to any disk drive through two independent
switched fabrics (in other words, the device adapters and switches are redundant).

In normal operation, however, disk drives are typically accessed by one device adapter and
one server. Each path on each device adapter can be active concurrently, but the set of eight
paths on the two device adapters can all be concurrently accessing independent disk drives.
It avoids any contention between the two device adapters for access to the same disk, and
means that all eight ports on the two device adapters can be concurrently communicating
with independent disk drives.

174 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm

Figure 8-8 Four paths to each disk drive

Self-learning cache algorithms: SARC

The DS8000 uses the Sequential Prefetching in Adaptive Replacement Cache (SARC)
algorithm, developed by IBM Storage development in partnership with IBM Research. It is a
self-tuning, self-optimizing solution for a wide range of workloads with a varying mix of
sequential and random I/O streams. SARC is inspired by the Adaptive Replacement Cache
(ARC) algorithm and inherits many features from it.

When a host performs a read I/O, the DS8000 fetches the data from the disk arrays through
the high performance switched disk architecture. The data is then cached in volatile memory
in case it is required again. The DS8000 attempt to anticipate future reads by the SARC
algorithm. Data is held in cache as long as possible using this smart algorithm. If a cache hit
occurs where requested data is already in cache, then the host does not have to wait for it to
be read from the disks.

SARC provides the following benefits:

 Sophisticated algorithms to determine what data is to be stored in cache based on the
recent access and frequency needs of the hosts.
 Pre-fetching, which anticipates data prior to a host request and loads it into cache.

Predictive Failure Analysis

The DS Enterprise Family uses Predictive Failure Analysis (PFA) to monitor disk drive
operations. PFA takes preemptive and automatic actions before critical drive failures occur.
The disk drives can anticipate certain forms of failures by keeping internal statistics of read
and write errors. If the error rates exceed predetermined threshold values, the drive will be
nominated for replacement. Because the drive has not yet failed, data can be copied directly
to a spare drive. It avoids using RAID recovery to reconstruct all of the data onto the spare
drive.

Chapter 8. Enterprise disk systems 175

5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Virtualization and configuration flexibility

The DS8000 family of products uses virtualization techniques to separate the logical view of
hosts from the underlying physical layer, as discussed in “Logical configuration overview” on
page 168. On the old ESS, there was a fixed association between logical subsystems (LSS)
and device adapters. With the DS8000, these limitations no longer apply (Figure 8-9).

Figure 8-9 Grouping of volumes in LSSs

Through virtualization, organizations can allocate system resources more effectively and
better control application quality of service. With no predefined association of arrays to LSSs
on the DS8000 series, users are free to put LUNs or CKD volumes into LSSs and make best
use of the 256 address range, overcoming previous ESS limitations, particularly for z System.

The DS8000 series provides a high configuration flexibility with the following virtualization
techniques:
 Dynamic Logical Unit (LUN) or Volume creation and deletion:
LUNs can be created and deleted without having to reformat a whole array.
 Large LUN and large CKD volume support:
LUNs and volumes can be configured to span arrays, which allows for large LUN sizes.
 Flexible LUN to LSS association:
There is no predefined association of arrays to logical subsystems (LSS).
 Simplified LUN masking:
The access to LUNs by the host systems is controlled by volume groups. Hosts or disks in
the same volume group share access to data.

176 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm

8.2.4 Overview of DS8000 recent features and technology

This section provides an overview of the most recent DS8000 features and technology.

Thin provisioning or space efficient volumes

The Thin Provisioning feature provides over-provisioning capability for more efficient usage of
the storage capacity and reduced storage management requirements, hence improving cost
efficiency and reducing the total cost of ownership (TCO).

The DS8870 provides two different types of Space Efficient volumes: Track Space Efficient
volumes and Extent Space Efficient volumes. Both of these features enable over-provisioning
capabilities that provide the customers with benefits in terms of more efficient usage of the
storage capacity and reduced storage management requirements.

A Space Efficient (or thin-provisioned) volume does not occupy physical capacity when it is
created. Space gets allocated when data is written to the volume. The amount of space that
gets physically allocated is a function of the amount of data that is written to or changes that
are made to the volume. The sum of capacities of all defined Space Efficient volumes can be
larger than the physical capacity available.

For more information, see DS8000 Thin Provisioning, REDP-4554 or the announcement
letter, available at this website:
http://www.ibm.com/common/ssi/rep_ca/1/897/ENUS109-431/ENUS109-431.PDF

Space Efficient FlashCopy

The FlashCopy Space Efficient (SE) capability enables more space efficient use of capacity
for FlashCopy operations, improving cost effectiveness.

How it works
FlashCopy SE uses Space Efficient volumes as FlashCopy target volumes. A Space Efficient
target volume has a virtual size that is equal to or greater than the source volume size.
However, space is not allocated for this volume when the volume is created and the
FlashCopy initiated. Only when updates are made to the source volume will any original
tracks of the source volume (that will be modified) are copied to the Space Efficient target
volume. Space in the repository is allocated for just these tracks or for any write to the target
itself.

For more information, see IBM System Storage DS8000 Series: IBM FlashCopy SE,
REDP-4368.

Limitations
Most options available for standard FlashCopy (as discussed in “FlashCopy and Space
Efficient FlashCopy” on page 214) are also available for FlashCopy SE. Only the options that
differ are discussed in this section:
 Incremental FlashCopy:
Because Incremental FlashCopy implies an initial full volume copy, and a full volume copy
is not possible in an IBM FlashCopy SE relationship, Incremental FlashCopy is not
possible with IBM FlashCopy SE.
 Data Set FlashCopy:
FlashCopy SE relationships are limited to full volume relationships. As a result, data set
level FlashCopy is not supported within FlashCopy SE.

Chapter 8. Enterprise disk systems 177

5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

 Multiple Relationship FlashCopy SE:

Standard FlashCopy supports up to 12 relationships and one of these relationships can be
incremental. There is always some impact when you are doing a FlashCopy or any kind of
copy within a storage subsystem. A FlashCopy onto a Space Efficient volume has more
impact because more tables must be maintained. All IBM FlashCopy SE relations are
nocopy relations; incremental FlashCopy is not possible. Therefore, the practical number
of IBM FlashCopy SE relationships from one source volume will be lower than 12. You
need to test in your own environment how many concurrent IBM FlashCopy SE
relationships are acceptable from a performance standpoint.
 Consistency Group FlashCopy:
With IBM FlashCopy SE, consistency groups can be formed in the same way as with
standard FlashCopy, as discussed in “FlashCopy and Space Efficient FlashCopy” on
page 214. Within a consistency group, there can be a mix of standard FlashCopy and IBM
FlashCopy SE relationships.

Quick Initialization
IBM supports Quick Initialization for open (FB) volumes as an enhancement to device
provisioning technology on DS8870 platforms. Quick initialization improves initialization
speeds up to 2.6 times over previous versions of the DS8700 and allows a copy services
relationship to be established after a device is created, while the provisioning of storage is in
progress. These improvements can help allow users to create an enterprise storage
environment, quickly provision new logical devices, and move the devices into production
while you use the new thin provisioning technology in less time than ever before on DS8700
systems.

Remote Pair FlashCopy

The Remote Pair FlashCopy feature (not in Licensed Machine Code 5.4.3x.xx) enables more
effective two-site business continuity with FlashCopy and Metro Mirror. It allows you to
establish a FlashCopy relationship where the target is a remote mirror Metro Mirror primary
volume that is keeping the pair in the full duplex state. This relationship significantly reduces
the recoverability time that exists when a FlashCopy background copy and Metro Mirror
Resync are in progress. The Remote Pair FlashCopy provides a solution for data replication,
data migration, remote copy, and disaster recovery tasks.

For business continuity, the Remote Pair FlashCopy operations are non-disruptive, allowing
the primary device of each FlashCopy pair to remain available to all hosts for both read and
write I/O operations. After being established, Remote Pair FlashCopy operations continue
unattended to support continuous data backup to the secondary device. z/OS support of
Remote Pair FlashCopy is available on z/OS V1.9, or later, using the name FlashCopy
Preserve Mirror.

For more information, see IBM System Storage DS8000: Remote Pair FlashCopy (Preserve
Mirror), REDP-4504.

178 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm

Multiple Global Mirror sessions

This support allows creation of separate global mirror sessions so that separate applications
can fail over to remote sites at different times. It became generally available with release 6.1.

LDAP authentication support

The DS8000 provides support for both unified sign-on functions (available through the DS
Storage Manager), and the ability to specify an existing Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
(LDAP) server.

The LDAP server can have existing users and user groups that can be used for authentication
on the DS8000. Setting up unified sign-on support for the DS8000 is achieved using the Tivoli
Storage Productivity Center. The LDAP authentication support allows single sign-on
functionality. It can simplify user management by allowing the DS8000 to rely on a centralized
LDAP directory rather than a local user repository.

For more information, see LDAP Authentication for IBM DS8000 Storage, REDP-4505.

Data encryption
The DS8870 supports data encryption with the use of Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager (TKLM).
The DS8870 only ships with encryption capable disks. However, a DS8800 with
non-encrypting disks can be upgraded to a DS8870. It is the only way that a DS8870 could
wind up with non-encrypting disks. The IBM Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager implements a key
server application and integrates with certain IBM storage products. The Tivoli Key Lifecycle
Manager can be installed on a set of servers to implement a set of redundant key servers. For
more information about TKLM, see Chapter 8, “Enterprise disk systems” on page 161.

Encryption capable storage devices that require key services from the key server are
configured to communicate with one or more key servers and the key servers are configured
to define the devices to which they are allowed to communicate. The storage device does not
maintain a persistent copy of the data key. Therefore, the storage device must access the
Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager to encrypt or decrypt data. To enable encryption, the DS8000
must be configured to communicate with two or more Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager key
servers. The physical connection between the DS8000 Hardware Management Console
(HMC) and the key server is through a TCP/IP network.

Enhancements to disk encryption key management that can help address PCI-DSS
(Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard) requirements:
 Encryption deadlock recovery key: Supports the ability for IBM to restore access to a
DS8870 when the encryption key for the storage is unavailable due to an encryption
deadlock scenario.
 Dual platform key server support: DS8000 requires an isolated key server in encryption
configurations. The isolated key server currently defined is an IBM System x server. Dual
platform key server support allows two different server platforms to host the key manager
with either platform operating in either “clear key” or “secure key” mode.

Deadlock recovery
The DS8000 family of storage servers with Full Disk Encryption drives can utilize a z System
key server running the Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager (TKLM) solution. A TKLM server provides
a robust platform for managing the multiple levels of encryption keys needed for a secure
storage operation. z System mainframes do not have local storage; their operating system,
applications, and application data are often stored on an enterprise-class storage server,
such as a DS8000 storage subsystem.

Chapter 8. Enterprise disk systems 179

5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

So it becomes possible, due to a planning error or even the use of automatically-managed

storage provisioning, for the z System TKLM server storage to end up residing on the DS8000
that is a client for encryption keys. After a power interruption event, the DS8000 becomes
inoperable because it must retrieve the Data Key (DK) from the TKLM database on the z
System server. The TKLM database becomes inoperable because the z System server has
its OS or application data on the DS8000. It represents a deadlock situation.

Recovery key
The DS8870 mitigates this problem by implementing a recovery key (RK). The recovery key
allows the DS8870 to decrypt the Group Key (GK) that it needs to come up to full operation.
A new customer role is defined in this process: the Security Administrator. This must be a
different person from the Storage Administrator so that no single user can perform recovery
key actions. Setting up the recovery key and use of the recovery key to boot a DS8700
requires both people to take action. Usage of a recovery key is entirely within the customer’s
control; no IBM service representative needs to be involved. The DS8870 never stores a copy
of the recovery key on the encrypted disks and it is never included in any service data.

For more information about encryption, see the following references:

 Chapter 23, “IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager” on page 617
 IBM DS8870 Disk Encryption, REDP-4500
 IBM DS8870 Architecture and Implementation, SG24-8085
 IBM Encrypted Storage Overview and Customer Requirements website:
http://www.ibm.com/support/techdocs/atsmastr.nsf/WebIndex/WP101479

Solid state drives

To improve data transfer rate (IOPS) and response time, IBM DS8000 series provides support
for solid state drives (SSDs), which have improved I/O transaction-based performance over
traditional platter-based drives. SSDs are a high-IOPS class enterprise storage device
targeted at Tier 0 applications that can use a high level of fast-access storage. SSDs offer a
number of potential benefits over hard disk drives, including up to 100 times the throughput
and 10 times lower response time than 15K r spinning disks, lower power consumption, less
heat generation, and lower acoustical noise.

Attention: RAID 6 and RAID 10 are not supported for SSD arrays.

For more information about SSDs, see DS8000: Introducing Solid State Drives, REDP-4522.

Easy Tier
The IBM System Storage DS8000 Easy Tier feature is an optional and no charge feature on
the DS8870. This feature offers enhanced capabilities through automated hot spot
management and data relocation, auto-rebalancing, manual volume rebalancing and volume
migration, rank depopulation, merging of extent pools, and thin provisioning support. Easy
Tier determines the appropriate tier of storage based on data access requirements and then
automatically and non-disruptively moves data, at the subvolume or sub-LUN level, to the
appropriate tier on the DS8000.

180 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm

The Easy Tier feature helps enable more effective storage consolidation by taking the
guesswork out of deploying solid-state drives. Easy Tier can automatically and dynamically
move the appropriate data to the appropriate drive tier in the system, based on ongoing
performance monitoring. The performance attributes of solid state drives are attractive but
they remain considerably more expensive than traditional spinning disks. Without the tools to
manage the effective placement of data across the various drive tiers in the system, you might
have been unwilling to pay high premiums for SSDs without knowing exactly which data to
place on them. For some organizations, it is acceptable; for many others, the inefficient use of
these expensive drives limits their appeal.

IBM Easy Tier assumes that SSDs do not benefit much from sequential workloads and that
Nearline disks are good candidates for data that is primarily accessed sequentially. Do not
worry that IBM Easy Tier might shift around all data when the nightly batch processing starts
or data backup jobs run. These processes are sequential nature and despite high I/O activity,
IBM Easy Tier does not move this data to SSDs right away. Tier 2 features the lowest disks
(Near-Line SAS), tier1 features the next performance level (SAS), and tier 0 features the
fastest disks (SSD).

Automatic or manual mode

IBM Easy Tier has two different operating modes to optimize the data placement on a
DS8000: automatic and manual. This section describes these modes of operation.

Easy Tier Automatic mode

Easy Tier automatic mode autonomically and dynamically manages the capacity in single-tier
(homogeneous) extent pools (auto-rebalance) and multitier (hybrid) extent pools that contain
up to three different disk tiers. With this facility, placement is done the most demanding pieces
of data (hot data) are placed on the appropriate storage media. The data relocation is at the
extent level. This significantly improves the overall storage cost-performance ratio and
simplifies the performance tuning and management.

IBM Easy Tier Automatic Mode manages the data relocation across different tiers (inter-tier or
cross-tier management) and within the same tier (intra-tier management). The cross-tier or
inter-tier capabilities deal with the Automatic Data Relocation (ADR) feature that aims to
relocate the extents of each logical volume to the most appropriate storage tier within the
extent pool to improve the overall storage cost-to-performance ratio. This task is done without
any user intervention and is fully transparent to the application host. Logical volume extents
with high latency in the rank are migrated to storage media with higher performance
characteristics. Extents with low latency in the rank are kept in storage media with lower
performance characteristics.

After a migration of extents is finished, the degree of hotness of the extents does not stay the
same over time. Eventually, certain extents on a higher performance tier become cold and
other extents on a lower-cost tier become hotter compared to cold extents on the higher
performance tier. When this event occurs, cold extents on a higher performance tier are
eventually demoted or swapped to a lower-cost tier and replaced by new hot extents from the
lower-cost tier. IBM Easy Tier always evaluates first if the cost of moving an extent to a higher
performance tier is worth the expected performance gain. It is shown in Figure 8-10.

Chapter 8. Enterprise disk systems 181

5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

Manual Mode
Easy Tier Manual Mode allows a set of manually initiated actions to relocate data among the
storage system resources in a dynamic fashion (without any disruption of the host
operations). The Manual Mode capabilities include dynamic volume relocation, dynamic
extent pool merge, and rank depopulation. Dynamic volume relocation allows a DS8000
volume to be migrated to the same or another extent pool. This capability also provides the
means to manually rebalance the extents of a volume across ranks when additional capacity
is added to the pool. Dynamic extent pool merge allows an extent pool to be merged to
another extent pool. Rank depopulation allows you to remove an allocated rank from an
extent pool and relocate the allocated extents to the other ranks in the pool.

Combining these different capabilities greatly improves the configuration flexibility of the
DS8000, providing ease of use.

Figure 8-10 DS8000 Easy Tier automatic mode

Easy Tier feature: Easy Tier is a DS8000 firmware function available with LMC level 6.5.1
or later. It is a no-cost LIC feature that must be ordered and installed.

For information about upgrading a DS8800 to a DS8870, see the model conversion
information in IBM DS8870 Architecture and Implementation, SG24-8085.

For more information about Easy Tier, see IBM DS8000 Easy Tier, REDP-4667, Chapter 7;
Architectured for Performance in the publication IBM DS8870 Architecture and
Implementation, SG24-8085, and IBM DS8000 Series Easy Tier Volume Extent Allocation
Chargeback Utility, REDP-4916.

182 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm

High Performance FICON for z System

High Performance FICON for z System (zHPF) is a new FICON protocol and system I/O
architecture that results in improvements for small block transfers (a track or less) to disk
using the device independent random access method. Instead of Channel Command Word
(CCWs), Transport Control Words (TCWs) can be used. I/O that is using the Media Manager,
such as IBM DB2®, PDSE, VSAM, zFS, VTOC Index (CVAF), Catalog BCS/VVDS, or
Extended Format SAM, will benefit from zHPF.

zHPF reduces the impact associated with supported commands on current adapter
hardware, thereby improving FICON throughput on the DS8000 I/O ports. The DS8700 also
supports the new zHPF I/O commands for multi-track I/O operations. With LMC level 6.5.1
and higher, the zHPF feature has been further enhanced by the implementation of the zHPF
Disable Transfer Ready protocol. It introduces the High Performance FICON Multi-track
Extended Distance capability, which provides higher throughput for longer distances.

Optional licensed feature

High Performance FICON for z (zHPF) is an optional licensed feature. In situations where it is
the exclusive access in use, it can improve FICON I/O throughput on a single DS8000 port by
100%. Realistic workloads with a mix of data set transfer sizes can see 30 - 70% of FICON
IOs utilizing zHPF, resulting in up to a 10-30% channel utilization savings.

Although customers can expect to see I/Os complete faster as the result of implementing
zHPF, the real benefit is expected to be obtained by using fewer channels to support existing
disk volumes, or increasing the number of disk volumes supported by existing channels.
Additionally, the changes in architecture offer end-to-end system enhancements to improve
reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS).

Support: Only the System IBM z10™, z196, z114, or zEC12 processors (or later) support
zHPF, and only on the FICON Express8, FICON Express 4, or FICON Express2 adapters.
The FICON Express adapters are not supported. The required software is z/OS V1.7
(or later) with IBM Lifecycle Extension for zOS V1.7 (5637-A01).

IBM Laboratory testing and measurements are available at the following website:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/z/hardware/connectivity/ficon_performance.html

zHPF is transparent to applications. However, z/OS configuration changes are required.

High Performance FICON for z System (zHPF) Extended Distance

This new feature enhances zHPF write performance by supporting the zHPF “Disable
Transfer Ready” protocol.

zHPF Extended Distance allows clients to achieve equivalent FICON write performance at a
distance, because some existing customers running multiple sites at long distances (10-100
km) cannot exploit zHPF due to the large impact to the write I/O service time.

8.3 IBM DS8870 architecture

This section describes the architecture of the IBM DS8870 and provides information about
the following components:
 DS8870 frames
 DS8870 architecture overview

Chapter 8. Enterprise disk systems 183

5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

 High Performance All-Flash system

 Disk Subsystem
 I/O enclosure adapter cards
 Power and cooling
 Management console network

8.3.1 Frames
The DS8870 is designed for modular expansion. From a high-level view, IBM offers three
configurations of the base model 961. However, the frames themselves are almost identical.
The only variations are the combinations of processors, I/O enclosures, storage enclosures,
batteries, and disks that the frames contain. DS8870 offers a High Performance All Flash
configuration, an Enterprise Class configuration, and a Business Class configuration.

DS8870 High Performance All-Flash Configuration

Figure 8-11 shows a fully configured DS8870 High Performance All-Flash Configuration.
The base frame (Model 961) contains the processor complexes, eight I/O enclosures, up to
eight high-performance flash enclosures, and power supplies.

Each frame contains redundant Direct Current Uninterruptible Power Supplies (DC-UPSs)
that feed redundant power hardware for all installed elements. All DC-UPSs in a system
contain either one or two sets of battery service modules (BSMs), depending on whether the
extended power line disruption (ePLD) feature is specified.

The High Performance All-Flash Configuration is designed for maximum performance and
connectivity in a small footprint, and does not support standard disk enclosures or expansion
frames.



 "#
   
     "$
" " " " "
   
"%

'  ' 
 (  ) ' *+. *+.

 !/ 1 !/ 1

*+. *+.
!/ 1 !/ 1
 
  
    !

 

 

 
*+. *+.

!/ 1 !/ 1

*+. *+.
!/ 1 !/ 1

Figure 8-11 Front view of fully configured All High Performance Flash system

184 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm

DS8870 Enterprise Class Configuration

Figure 8-12 shows a fully configured four-frame DS8870 Enterprise Class Configuration
system. The left frame is a base frame (Model 961) that contains the processor complexes,
I/O enclosures, disk enclosures, and high-performance flash enclosures (HPFEs). The
second frame is an expansion frame (96E) that contains more I/O and disk enclosures but no
additional processor complexes or HPFEs. The third and fourth frames are also expansion
frames that contain only disk and power enclosures.

Each frame contains redundant DC-UPSs that feed redundant power hardware for all
installed elements. All DC-UPSs in a system contain either one or two sets of BSMs,
depending on whether the ePLD feature is specified.

) *!' ( ) *!' ( )+ *!' ( )9 *!' (

) *!' ( ) *!' ( )+ *!' ( )9 *!' (

 ) *!' ( )3 *!' ( )! *!' ( ) *!' (

     ) *!' ( )3 *!' ( )! *!' ( ) *!' (
   
" " " " )+ *!' ( )5 *!' ( ) *!' ( )+ *!' (
   
 ) *!' ( )+ *!' (
)+ *!' ( )5 *!' (
 !  ! 
 "  # ! ) *!' ( )! *!' (
)! *!' ( )9 *!' (

)! *!' ( )9 *!' ( ) *!' ( )! *!' (

) *!' ( ) *!' ( )3 *!' ( ) *!' (

  ) *!' (   ) *!' (   )3 *!' (   ) *!' (
    )3 *!' (  )5 *!' (  ) *!' (
    !
)3 *!' ( )5 *!' ( ) *!' (

)5 *!' ( )9 *!' ( )3 *!' (

 
)5 *!' ( )9 *!' ( )3 *!' (

) *!' ( )5 *!' (

 
) *!' ( )5 *!' (

      )+ *!' (   )9 *!' (
$%& $%& $%& $%& 
  )+ *!' (
 )9 *!' (
!' ( !' ( !' ( !' (
)! *!' ( ) *!' (

$%& $%& $%& $%& )! *!' ( ) *!' (
!' ( !' ( !' ( !' (

; " " < " !=< " >=< "

Figure 8-12 Front view of fully configured Enterprise Class configuration with four frames

DS8870 Business Class Configuration

Figure 8-13 on page 186 shows a fully configured three-frame DS8870 Business Class
configuration System. The left frame is a base frame (Model 961) that contains the processor
complexes, I/O enclosures, disk enclosures, and HPFEs. The second frame is an expansion
frame (96E) that contains more I/O and disk enclosures but no additional processor
complexes or HPFEs. The third frame is also an expansion frame that contains only disk and
power enclosures.

Each frame contains redundant DC-UPSs that feed redundant power hardware for all
installed elements. All DC-UPSs in a system contain either one or two sets of BSMs,
depending on whether the ePLD feature is specified.

Chapter 8. Enterprise disk systems 185

5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm

$! %!& ' $+ %!& ' $3 %!& '

$! %!& ' $+ %!& ' $3 %!& '


 $ %!& ' $+ %!& ' $3 %!& '
    
     $ %!& ' $+ %!& ' $3 %!& '
" " " "
    $ %!& ' $+ %!& ' $5 %!& '
 $+ %!& ' $5 %!& '
!  !  $ %!& '

"  # !
 $+ %!& ' $5 %!& '
$ %!& '

$ %!& ' $+ %!& ' $5 %!& '

$ %!& ' $! %!& ' $5 %!& '

$ %!& ' $! %!& ' $5 %!& '

     
    $! %!& '  $5 %!& '
    !
$! %!& ' $5 %!& '

$! %!& ' $ %!& '

 
$! %!& ' $ %!& '

$ %!& '

 
$ %!& '

      $ %!& '

()* ()* ()* ()*
   $ %!& '
!& ' !& ' !& ' !& '
$ %!& '

()* ()* ()* ()* $ %!& '

!& ' !& ' !& ' !& '

. " " / " !0/ "

Figure 8-13 Front view of fully configured Business Class configuration with three frames

DS8870 Base Frame

As shown in Figure 8-12 on page 185, the left side of the base frame (viewed from the front of
the system) is the frame power area. Only the base frame contains rack power control (RPC)
cards to control power sequencing for the storage unit. Previous models in the IBM DS8000
series contain primary power supply (PPS) units and separate battery backup units (BBUs).
All DS8870 frames use DC-UPSs that convert incoming alternating current (ac) input to
rectified AC.

RoHS compliant: The DS8870 is Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) compliant.

Each DC-UPS consists of one DC supply unit (DSU), and up to two battery service module
(BSM) sets. The number of BSM sets depends on whether the system includes the ePLD
feature.

The base frame contains two central processor complexes (CPCs). These POWER7+ based
servers contain the processors and memory that drive all functions within the DS8870.

Physically located between the storage enclosures and the processor complexes are two
Ethernet switches and the storage Hardware Management Console (HMC).

The base frame also contains I/O enclosures, which are installed in pairs horizontally. These
I/O enclosures provide connectivity between the adapters and the processors. Each I/O
enclosure can contain up to two host adapters (HAs), two device adapters (DAs) and two
Flash Interface Adapters.

The DS8870 uses PCI Express Generation 2 (PCIe Gen2) connections to provide
adapter-to-CPC communication and to transfer I/O data.

186 IBM System Storage Solutions Handbook

Draft Document for Review May 11, 2015 8:13 pm 5250_Ch08_Enterprise_Disk.fm

The base frame can contain up to eight HPFEs in the All Flash configuration. In the
Enterprise Class and Business Class configurations, the base frame can contain up to four
HPFEs, plus 10 standard disk enclosures, which are installed in pairs. Standard drive
enclosures are available in Small Form Factor (SFF) and Large Form Factor (LFF) versions.

For more information about the disk subsystem, see IBM Redbooks publication IBM DS8870
Architecture and Implementation, SG24-8085.

Hard disk drives are installed in groups of 16. flash drives can be installed in groups of 16 (full
disk set) or 8 (half disk set). A storage enclosure pair for LFF Nearline-SAS HDDs can only
contain LFF disks. The 4 TB Nearline-SAS HDD can be installed in groups of 8 (full drive set).

Additionally, the Business Class and Enterpris